tac microzone ii programmer's manual - hvac-talk

TAC MICROZONE II

PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL

LITHO IN U.S.A. 8/08 F-23118-2

How to use this Manual

This manual is intended for TAC PERSONNEL. It is a supplement to the training available through the TAC TRAINING CENTER. This reference manual will be an aid to the application engineer in the programming of the control applications within the TAC NETWORK 8000™ MICROZONE®II controllers. The programmer must be familiar with the operation of the TAC NETWORK 8000 system to properly engineer and program the control and energy management applications.

The APPENDIX at the back of this manual contains information on the SGRP (SEND GROUP DATA) and the ZONE2 (TAC MICROZONE II) blocks. These blocks reside in the TAC NETWORK 8000 GCM-8xx2x controllers. This information is needed for programming the parent GCM controller as part of an integrated TAC NETWORK 8000 System using TAC MICROZONE II controllers.

The SGRP (SEND GROUP DATA) and the ZONE2 TAC (MICROZONE II) blocks will be incorporated in a future release of the TAC GCM/LCM PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL F-23120.

FCC

NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures.

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. DOC

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

Disclaimer

All specifications are nominal and may change as design improvements occur. TAC shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.

Revisions

TAC reserves the right to update technical documentation at any time. TAC will issue revisions as specifications change and design improvements occur.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Introduction................................................................. 1

Tutorial........................................................................ 3

Introduction.................................................... 3

Off-line operation........................................... 5

On-line operation........................................... 9

Programming Basics .................................................. 27

Introduction.................................................... 27

System Architecture ...................................... 28

The Block Programming Concept ................. 32

TAC MICROZONE II Blocks.......................... 34

Block execution ............................................. 39

Basic Block Description................................. 40

Example of Block Programming.................... 43

Common Block Attributes.............................. 44

Time and Date............................................... 46

Devices with Clock ........................... 46

Devices without Clock ...................... 46

Valid and invalid time conditions. ..... 47

System Resets .............................................. 49

Power Failure Reset......................... 49

Momentary Power Glitch Reset ....... 49

Sending a New File to a Device ....... 50

Reset Button..................................... 51

PSI Reset ......................................... 51

Block Reset <Alt> R ......................... 52

Number system ............................................. 53

Block Inputs ................................................... 54

Device Setup ................................................. 55

User Access .................................................. 58

Override......................................................... 62

Point History Log ........................................... 63

Points History Data........................... 63

BLOCKS - General ..................................................... 65

AO - Analog Output Block .......................................... 67

Attributes ....................................................... 67

Parameters....................................... 67

Inputs................................................ 68

Table of Contents © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. i

Table of Contents

Outputs ............................................. 68

Applying the block ......................................... 68

DO - Digital Output Block ........................................... 71

Attributes ....................................................... 71

Parameters....................................... 71

Inputs................................................ 71

Outputs ............................................. 71


EMS - EMS Input Block.............................................. 73

Attributes ....................................................... 74

Parameters....................................... 74

Inputs................................................ 74

Outputs ............................................. 75


HOLI - Holiday Schedule Block................................ 81

Attributes ....................................................... 81

Parameters....................................... 81

Inputs................................................ 83

Outputs ............................................. 83


LOOP - General ....................................................... 87

LOOP - One setpoint, Dir/Rev output....................... 89

Attributes ....................................................... 89

Parameters....................................... 89

Inputs................................................ 90

Outputs ............................................. 91


LOOP - Two SP, combined output........................... 95

Attributes ....................................................... 95

Parameters....................................... 95

Inputs................................................ 96

Outputs ............................................. 96


LOOP - One setpoint / Two output........................... 99

Attributes ....................................................... 99

Parameters....................................... 99

Inputs................................................ 100

Outputs ............................................. 100


ii © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. F-23118-2

Table of Contents

LOOP - Two setpoint, Two output............................ 103

Attributes ....................................................... 103

Parameters....................................... 103

Inputs................................................ 104

Outputs ............................................. 105


LOOP - Offset setpoint, Two Output ........................ 111

Attributes ....................................................... 111

Parameters....................................... 111

Inputs................................................ 112

Outputs ............................................. 113


LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 1 ........................................ 117

Attributes ....................................................... 118

Parameters....................................... 118

Inputs................................................ 118

Outputs ............................................. 119



Attributes ....................................................... 126

Parameters....................................... 126

Inputs................................................ 126

Outputs ............................................. 127


LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 2 with cooling .................... 131

Attributes ....................................................... 132

Parameters....................................... 132

Inputs................................................ 133

Outputs ............................................. 134



Attributes ....................................................... 140

Parameters....................................... 140

Inputs................................................ 141

Outputs ............................................. 142


LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 3 with cooling .................... 147

Attributes ....................................................... 148

Parameters....................................... 148

Table of Contents © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. iii

Table of Contents

Inputs................................................ 149

Outputs ............................................. 150


OSS - Optimum Start Stop Block ............................. 157

Attributes ....................................................... 157

Parameters....................................... 157

Inputs................................................ 158

Outputs ............................................. 159


RESET - Setpoint reset ............................................ 163

Attributes ....................................................... 163

Parameters....................................... 163

Inputs................................................ 164

Outputs ............................................. 164


Reset Function using Utility Blocks ............... 168

Direct Action Reset........................... 169

Reverse Action Reset ..................... 169

RGRP - Receive Group Data Block ......................... 171

Attributes ....................................................... 172

Parameters....................................... 172

Inputs................................................ 172

Outputs ............................................. 173


SCHED - Schedule Block......................................... 179

Attributes ....................................................... 179

Parameters....................................... 179

Inputs................................................ 183

Outputs ............................................. 183


Scheduling Examples.................................... 187

Simple time of day schedule ............ 187

Schedule interaction......................... 188

Interface with the HOLI block ........... 189

Regular and holiday schedules ........ 190

SEQ - Sequence Block............................................. 193

Attributes ....................................................... 193

Parameters....................................... 193

Inputs................................................ 194

iv © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. F-23118-2

Table of Contents

Outputs ............................................. 194


Linear Sequencing ........................... 194

DIRECT LINEAR Operation ............. 195

REVERSE LINEAR Operation ......... 195

LINEAR Operation............................ 196

BINARY Sequencing ........................ 197

DIRECT BINARY Operation............. 198

REVERSE BINARY Operation......... 199

Binary with interstage delay ............. 199

UI - Universal Input Block........................................ 201

Attributes ....................................................... 202

Parameters....................................... 202

Inputs................................................ 204

Outputs ............................................. 205

Active Attribute Table .................................... 206


Switch Types .................................... 206

Thermistor Example ......................... 207

Balco Example ................................. 208

Copper Example............................... 209

Platinum Example ............................ 209

Current 4 to 20 mA Example............ 210

0 to 5 VDC Example......................... 211

Digital Input Example ....................... 212

Pulse Counter Example ................... 213

Potentiometer Interface Example..... 215

UTILITY BLOCK-General........................................... 219

UTIL - Counter function ............................................. 221

Attributes ....................................................... 221

Parameters....................................... 221

Inputs................................................ 221

Outputs ............................................. 222


UTIL - Drive function .................................................. 225

Attributes ....................................................... 225

Parameters....................................... 225

Inputs................................................ 225

Outputs ............................................. 226

Table of Contents © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. v

Table of Contents


UTIL - Flow detect function ....................................... 229

Attributes ....................................................... 229

Parameters....................................... 229

Inputs................................................ 229

Outputs ............................................. 229


UTIL - Limit function ................................................... 233

Attributes ....................................................... 233

Parameters....................................... 233

Inputs................................................ 233

Outputs ............................................. 233


UTIL - Logic function ................................................. 235

Attributes ....................................................... 235

Parameters....................................... 235

Inputs................................................ 235

Outputs ............................................. 235


UTIL - Math function.................................................. 241

Attributes ....................................................... 241

Parameters....................................... 241

Inputs................................................ 242

Outputs ............................................. 242


UTIL - Momentary Start / Stop function..................... 245

Attributes ....................................................... 245

Parameters....................................... 245

Inputs................................................ 245

Outputs ............................................. 245


UTIL - Process Alarm Function ................................. 247

Attributes ....................................................... 247

Parameters....................................... 247

Inputs................................................ 247

Outputs ............................................. 247


UTIL - PWM Function................................................ 251

Attributes ....................................................... 251

vi © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. F-23118-2

Table of Contents

Parameters....................................... 251

Inputs................................................ 251

Outputs ............................................. 252


Time Proportioned Control ............... 253

Fixed Duty Cycle Control ................. 254

Compensated Duty cycle ................. 255

PWM for an actuator ........................ 256

UTIL - Selection function general ............................... 261

UTIL - Selection block, Switch function...................... 263

Attributes ....................................................... 263

Parameters....................................... 263

Inputs................................................ 263

Outputs ............................................. 264


UTIL - Selection block, High/Low Selection ............... 265

Attributes ....................................................... 265

Parameters....................................... 265

Inputs................................................ 265

Outputs ............................................. 266


UTIL - Selection block, Loop invert function............... 267

Attributes ....................................................... 267

Parameters....................................... 267

Inputs................................................ 267

Outputs ............................................. 268


UTIL - Status function................................................ 269

Attributes ....................................................... 269

Parameters....................................... 269

Inputs................................................ 269

Outputs ............................................. 269


UTIL - Thermostat function......................................... 271

Attributes ....................................................... 271

Parameters....................................... 271

Inputs................................................ 271

Outputs ............................................. 271


Table of Contents © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. vii

Table of Contents

UTIL - Timer function-General .................................. 273

UTIL - Timer function, ON delay ................................ 275

Attributes ....................................................... 275

Parameters....................................... 275

Inputs................................................ 275

Outputs ............................................. 275


UTIL - Timer function, OFF delay............................... 277

Attributes ....................................................... 277

Parameters....................................... 277

Inputs................................................ 277

Outputs ............................................. 277


UTIL - Timer function, Dual delay .............................. 279

Attributes ....................................................... 279

Parameters....................................... 279

Inputs................................................ 279

Outputs ............................................. 279


UTIL - Timer function, Min ON ................................... 281

Attributes ....................................................... 281

Parameters....................................... 281

Inputs................................................ 281

Outputs ............................................. 281


UTIL - Timer function, Min OFF.................................. 283

Attributes ....................................................... 283

Parameters....................................... 283

Inputs................................................ 283

Outputs ............................................. 283


UTIL - Timer function, Dual min ................................. 285

Attributes ....................................................... 285

Parameters....................................... 285

Inputs................................................ 285

Outputs ............................................. 285


WINDO - Window block............................................ 287

Attributes ....................................................... 287

viii © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. F-23118-2

Table of Contents

Parameters....................................... 287

Inputs................................................ 288

Outputs ............................................. 288


Table of Contents © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. ix

Introduction

Introduction

This reference manual is intended to be an aid in the programming of the control applications within the TAC NETWORK 8000™ MICROZONE®II controllers. The programmer must be familiar with the operation of the TAC NETWORK 8000 system to properly engineer and program the control and energy management applications.

Intended Audience

Prerequisites The programmer should be familiar with the complete overview of the TAC NETWORK 8000 system as presented in the OVERVIEW OF TAC NETWORK 8000 Independent Study Course #3119 available through the TAC TRAINING PROGRAM. This field study course provides workbooks, videotapes, and hardware exercises. Some of the subjects covered, exercised, and self tested include: An overview of the architecture and function of the system, system access and operation, exception annunciation, editing, and typical diagnostics and troubleshooting tips.

The programmer may want to complete the TAC NETWORK 8000 MICROZONE II ENGINEERING COURSE offered through the TAC TRAINING PROGRAM. This course provides an intensive class that teaches the proper methods to successfully engineer and start up TAC MICROZONE II jobs. Topics include TAC MICROZONE II component structure, block programming skills, product setup, and operations. Training is developed through the use of simulators and engineering work stations. Documentation procedures are presented as well as other tools necessary for the successful implementation of your DDC projects.

What this manual is about

This manual is a detailed block programming reference manual. Reference information is provided on the block programming concept for the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The basic rules for programming the blocks within the TAC MICROZONE II controller are presented.

The block section contains detailed reference information for each of the blocks within the TAC MICROZONE II application software. Illustrations of the blocks used in typical applications are also presented. The blocks within this section are presented in alphabetical order according to the abbreviated name. Configurations within a particular block are presented in the order of appearance in the configuration selection list. It is recommended that you become familiar with the structure of these sections.

A tutorial section is provided for the users of the PSI (Personal System Interface) and the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The purpose of this tutorial is to familiarize the programmer through hands-on interaction with the PSI software in the programming and checkout of an application within the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The PSI will be used throughout this tutorial to program the controller. A tutorial on the PSI operations is found

Introduction © Copyright 2006 TAC. All Rights Reserved. 1

Introduction

in the PSI Programmer's Manual and should be executed before begining the next section.

Applicable Documentation

Other documentation that may be helpful on this product.

PSI Installation Instruction (F-23056) - Provides information on installing the PSI (LAPT-80800-PSI) software into both Personal Computers and the ATARI Portfolio*.

PSI Programmer's Manual (F-23117) - Provides information on the operation of the PSI (LAPT-80800-PSI) software within both the Personal Computer and the ATARI Portfolio.

Portfolio Hand Held Computer Owner's Manual - Provides general information on the ATARI Portfolio, its operating system, its incorporated applications, error messages, etc.

Portfolio Smart Parallel Interface Owner's Manual - Provides general information on the ATARI Portfolio Parallel Interface, how to install and de-install it, how to do file transfers, troubleshooting help, etc.

MS-DOS* or PC-DOS based personal computer Manual - Provides general information on the use of the DOS operating system, its incorporated applications, error messages, etc.

* Atari, the Atari logo, and Portfolio are ™ or ® of Atari Corporation. * MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

2 © Copyright 2006 TAC. All Rights Reserved. F-23118-1

Tutorial

Tutorial

Introduction Interfacing with the TAC MICROZONE II controller is achieved with the use of an ATARI or a Personal Computer running the TAC MICROZONE II PSI software. The basic operation is covered in the PSI Programmer's Manual (F-23117).

The purpose of this tutorial is to familiarize the programmer with the programming and checkout of an application within the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The functions that will be demonstrated will include:

• OFF-LINE operation. With the use of the PSI program we will demonstrate the creation of a new application program (File) and the editing of this new application program.

• ON-LINE operation. The PSI program will be interfaced with the TAC MICROZONE II controller. This will provide the ability to download a file to a controller, verify that the program was successfully transferred to the controller and checkout the operation of the application using the CURRENT STATUS, TREND and OVERRIDE functions.

What you need to perform this tutorial:

This tutorial is set up so that the operator can interface directly with the TAC MICROZONE II controller through an ATARI Portfolio or PC. Some wiring will be required as shown on the wiring diagram.

Equipment needed:

TAC MICROZONE II controller.

Line to 24 VAC transformer, 20 VA, 60 Hz or 30 VA, 50 Hz.

Line cord for transformer.

Single pole, single throw switch or equivalent.

250Ω ± 1%, 50 ppm, 1/4 watt resistor (TAC part number AD-8969-202, kit of six resistors).

Wire - 22 to 18 gauge, lengths as required. Shielded wire is not required for this tutorial.

PSI software on an ATARI or PC. The PSI software must include the TUTORIAL file (TUTORIAL.MZ2) in the same DOS subdirectory.

ASD bus interface (EMSC-413 for ATARI Portfolio).

Note: This tutorial can be performed using the EMSC - 428 TAC MICROZONE II Demonstrator. This demonstrator can be purchased from TAC. Setup and wiring instructions for using the demonstrator are located at the end of this Tutorial section.

Tutorial © Copyright 2006 TAC. All Rights Reserved. 3

Tutorial

Wire the MICROZONE II controller as shown:

Setup of the Hardware

Note: This tutorial can be preformed with a TAC MICROZONE II controller where the inputs and the outputs have not been wired, however, some of the operations described in this tutorial will not be able to be completed as described.

The PC or Atari Portfolio hardware needs to be assembled as shown:

For assembly details see the PSI Programmer's Manual (F-23117).

The PSI software should be loaded into the ATARI or the PC. To perform the tutorial, the PSI software must include the TUTORIAL file. For details on how to load the PSI software and how to run the PSI program see the PSI Installation Instruction (F-23056).


Tutorial

Off-line operation Even when the PSI is not connected to a controller, a number of functions can be performed. These include: EDIT - FILES, and PSI SETUP. As an off line operation, we will create, edit, and save a new file. Later we will download this file into the TAC MICROZONE II controller which we prepared for our on line operation. This tutorial assumes that the reader is familiar with the PSI setup and operations as described in the PSI Programmer's Manual (F-23117).

Log on to the PSI. The user must log on with a username USER and password PASS. This username and password should be set up in the PSI with a level 6 access. Level 6 provides full access to all of the programming functions of the system.

First make a copy of the TUTORIAL file and name it AHU_2. The steps required to accomplish this are as follows:

• Select FILES from the Functions menu.

• Select COPY from the Files operations menu.

• Select the TUTORIAL file.

• When prompted, enter AHU_2 <ENTER> to ccreate a copy of the TUTORIAL file

Now the Files list will contain a new file called AHU_2.

No Connected Device

OperationsGET SEND COPY DELETE

FilesAHU_2 TUTORIAL

No Connected Device


Files-DIR- AHU_2 TUTORIAL

No Connected Device | Directory: [C:\PSI\MZ2]

Introduction

Start-up

File creation

Atari Portfolio Screen PC Screen

Editing a file EDIT the AHU_2 file.

• Go to the Functions menu and select EDIT.

Note: To get to the main menu press <Esc> repeatedly until the Functions menu appears or press the Tab key.

• We wish to edit a file in the PSI database so we must select FILE.

• Select the AHU_2 file to edit.

EditDEVICE FILE

Files-NEW- AHU_2 TUTORIAL

-SETUP- -ACCESS- AO:1 AO:2 AO:3

Data List

<MIX AIR > <HT VALVE> < >

Note: If the tutorial is being performed on a PC, the list of attributes displayed is longer than on the Portfolio.


Tutorial

• Using the arrow keys, review the list of blocks. The list should contain the following active blocks:

AO:1 <MIX AIR >

AO:2 <HT VALVE>

AO:4 <Signal >

DO:1 <CL 1 >

DO:2 <CL 2 >

DO:3 <CL 3 >

DO:4 <CL 4 >

DO:5 <FAN >

LOOP:1 <Ht/Cl >

UI:1 <FAN S/S >

UI:3 <ZONE T >

UTIL:25 <Speed >

UTIL:26 <Off Dely >

UTIL:27 <Hold Sw >

UTIL:28 <Ramp Spd>

UTIL:29 <Ramp Gen>

UTIL:30 <Ramp Lmt>

Note: The complete list of blocks will be displayed. However, only the blocks which have been assigned names will be classified as active blocks in this tutorial presentation.

The complete diagram of how these blocks are interconnected is shown in the next figure. The utility blocks below the solid line are used to generate a simulated temperature fluctuation between 50°F and 90°F. This signal is interconnected between AO:4 and UI:3 as the zone sensor temperature. The blocks above the solid line are used in the tutorial application.


Tutorial

70.0 20.0 ON 10%

ON

0.0

AI SP INDIF

0.0

OFF .3 Min

UTIL:27

UTIL:29UTIL:28UTIL:25

2.0

144.0UTIL:26

UI:2

+0.1-0.1

Off Delay

FLOW

+

AO:4

Signal

70

UTIL:30

40

SEQ:1

UI:3

ZONE T

250 ž Resistor

Mixed Air Damper

DO:1

Heating Valve

DO:2

DO:3

DO:4

Stage 1 Cooling

AO:2

AO:1

Stage 2 Cooling

Stage 3 Cooling

Stage 4 Cooling

DO:5 Fan UI:1

Fan Start/Stop

FAN

CL 1

CL 2

CL 3

CL 4

HT VALVE

MIX AIR

FAN S/S

CL SEQ

Hold Sw

Ramp SpdRamp Gen Speed

Ramp Lmt

TIMER

TSTAT

(A1+A2)/A3

OUT1

If device is not wired, point LOOP:1ENABLE to UTIL:25 OUT1.

+ -

+ -

OUT

Simulated temperature generator

1 to 5 VDC 50 to 90°F

LOOP:1

ENABL OCCUP INPUT SP TR ECENA ECMIN

AV REVAV

ECAV

ASHRAE Cyle 2//Cool ECCL= Disabled

HT/CL

Completing the application

To complete the tutorial application it will be necessary to add two more blocks to the active list. These blocks are shown in the diagram with dashed outlines.

The first block we will add will be UI:2.

• Use the arrow keys to locate and select UI:2.

EditDEVICE FILE


SCHED:4 SEQ:1 SEQ:2 UI:1 UI:2

Data List< > < > < > <FAN S/S > < >

EDIT the UI:2 block • Edit UI:2 to make it a direct acting digital input point.


Tutorial

• Edit the UI:2 block to contain the following attributes:

CONFG = DIRECT DIGITAL

NAME = FLOW

UNITS = DIGTL

<CONFG> <NAME> <UNITS>

Edit Block: UI:2 < >

DIRECT DIGITAL FLOW DIGTL

-Outputs-

-Parameters-

As learned during the PSI tutorial, you can save these changes to the file by pressing Alt S. If you forget to save the changes and try to leave the block by pressing Esc, you will be prompted with a message asking if you want to save these changes before quitting the edit function. If you were to enter N for NO, any modifications you may have made since the last time the block was saved will not be made and you will exit from the block. If you enter Y for YES, the block modifications will be saved to the file.

The second block we will add will be SEQ:1.

• Use the arrow keys to locate and select SEQ:1.

EDIT the SEQ:1 block • Edit SEQ:1 to make it a four stage sequencer to perform the staged mechanical cooling.

The block should be setup to contain the following attributes:

-Parameters-

NSTAG = 4STAGES

NAME = CL SEQ

ACTON = DIR LINEAR

-Inputs-

AI = LOOP:1:AV

DELAY = 0.0 SEC

<NSTGS> <NAME> <ACTON>

4 STAGES CL SEQ

DIR LINEAR-Inputs-

Edit Block: SEQ:1 < >-Parameters-

Note: The pointer assignment for the analog input (AI) attribute

can be setup using one of two methods. First, with the cursor located at the AI attribute, you can type in the attribute LOOP:1:AV Ret. Secondly, with the cursor located at the AI attribute, you can press Alt P for pointer help. A list of all of the blocks will be displayed. Select the LOOP:1 block and a list of all the available outputs will be displayed. Select the AV output.


Tutorial

<AI> <DELAY> <STAG1>

SECLOOP:1:AV

0.0

*****-Outputs-

-Inputs-Edit Block: SEQ:1 < >

Save the changes to the file. Verify that the block list now contains the two new active blocks, SEQ:1 <CL SEQ > and UI:2 <FLOW >.

Note: To make a block not active, edit the block and select NOT USED as its configuration.

Naming the device Last, this application will be applied theoretically in a TAC MICROZONE II controlling one of the air handlers (AHU 2) in section 1 of our building. We can add a descriptive device name to this file which can be helpful when we monitor different controllers within a system. A descriptive name for the device can be assigned under -SETUP- in the data list menu.

Select SETUP and scroll down to <DEVIC> and add a device name such as Sec1 Zn2 to this file.

EditDEVICE FILE


-SETUP- -ACCESS- AO:1 AO:2 AO:3

Data List

<MIX AIR > <HT VALVE> < >

<UNIT2> <UNIT3> <UNIT4> <DEVIC> <APPL >

Edit Block: -SETUP-GPM kPa

Lsec Sec1 Zn2

NONE

Use <ALT> S to save this new setup and <ESC> to the main function menu.

If this tutorial is to be preformed with a TAC MICROZONE II controller where the inputs and the outputs have not been wired, it will be necessary to modify (edit) the LOOP:1 block. Change the INPUT pointer to UTIL:25:OUT1.

In this OFF-LINE tutorial we have learned through the use of the PSI program how to create of a new application program (File) by coping an existing file. We learned how to edit the new application blocks and setup. We now have an application file which we can download into a TAC MICROZONE II controller and by using the PSI program interact with it dynamically in an on-line operation.

On-line operation Introduction When the PSI is connected to a TAC MICROZONE II controller,

all of the functions can be performed. These include: CURRENT STATUS, EDIT, SYSTEM, TREND, DEVICE NUMBER, NODE LIST, FILES, and PSI SETUP. As an on line operation, we will download a file into a TAC MICROZONE II controller, we will checkout the operation of this application using


Tutorial

the current status, trend, edit, and override features. We will also upload and delete files.

The application AHU_2 has been designed to provide both an user interactive simulator to learn how to use the functions of the PSI and a simulated application in which good software checkout procedures can be practiced.

Setup Connect the PSI interface to the TAC MICROZONE II controller by inserting the RJ-12 plug into the receptacle on the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The TAC MICROZONE II controller should be wired as shown in the wiring diagram. The switch wired to IN1 (input 1) should be open (OFF). The address switch on the controller should be set to address #1.

Apply power to the MICROZONE II controller.

Log On to the PSI (User must log on with a username of USER and password of PASS). When the function menu appears, the device type and address to which the PSI is connected will appear in the header if you are using an Atari Portfolio. The name that was assigned to the device will also appear in the header after a control program with a device name has been downloaded into the device. If you are using a PC, the header will indicate "No Connected Device", press the backspace key to initiate the communication function.


Tutorial

HEADER

FunctionsDevice: MZII #001 < >

CURRENT STATUS EDIT SYSTEM TREND DEVICE NUMBER

If the header indicates "No Connected Device", make sure that the Atari or PC is properly connected to the controller and try logging on again or press the backspace key to initiate the communications link again.

Download the AHU_2 file into the TAC MICROZONE II controller.

• Select FILES from the main function menu.

• Select SEND file.

• Select the file to be sent to the controller (AHU_2), press Return.


FilesAHU_2 TUTORIAL

Device: MZII #001 < >

The device address to which we want to send this file is one (1).


FilesAHU_2 TUTORIAL

Enter Device Number to Send To1

Device: MZII #001 < >

The PSI will respond with a number of quick flashes of Loading File and sending User Access Data screens ending up with the Sending the Control Program screen. Sending the control program will take a few seconds.

Sending Control Program

Downloading a file into a controller

Verifying a file in a controller

To verify that the file was successfully loaded into the controller, ESC back to the Function Menu. Select EDIT, then select DEVICE (not the FILE). The PSI will respond with a screen indicating that the program is being uploaded into the computer and show the Data List. Review the items in the Data List. The list should contain all the setup information and the active blocks that were set up in the file during the off-line session. If the download was not successful, diagnostic screens will be displayed indicating why. For example, if the ASD communications wire is not connected to the controller when a download is attempted, a communications error will be displayed. Correct the problem and retry the download function.


Tutorial

Editing a program in a controller

When editing the control program in a device, a copy of the program is uploaded into the computer. The PSI editor allows the user to view and change the data in this working file. If changes are made to any item in the data list, the user can save the changes by pressing (Alt S). The changes will be saved to the working file in the computer and sent down to the controller where the changes are made to the database in the device.

Note: Changes to the control program are not saved in the device until you type <ALT> S or ESC to leave the block and save the changes. The working file in the computer is the file in the editor and is NOT the original stored file.

If the user makes changes and forgets to save them, he will be prompted, when leaving the block, with a request to either save the changes or exit the item without saving. If he chooses to exit without saving, the changes made since the last time a save was done will be lost.

Note: These changes will not be saved to the original file in the PSI until an upload (GET file) is done and saved to a file name with the same name. For example: If we were to edit the Device Name under SETUP to a new name such as Sec1 Ut2, we would edit the device name, and save (<Alt> S) the changes. The changes will be saved to the working file in the computer and sent down to the controller where the changes are made to the file in the device. The AHU_2 file in the PSI will still have the device name as Sec1 Zn2. To keep both the device file and the file in the PSI current, it is wise to do an upload (GET file) periodically and save it as the same name (in this case AHU_2) in the PSI.

CURRENT STATUS Operation

Select CURRENT STATUS on the Functions menu. The current status function allows the user to monitor the real time values of the physical input and output points. The CURRENT STATUS function behaves differently on the PC version then on the Atari version. Instructions for each are described below:

CURRENT STATUS on the Personal Computer

The CURRENT STATUS screen on the Personal Computer displays all of the active inputs and outputs. The name assigned to each of the points is displayed after the point number. The current point value is displayed in both text and graphical formats.


Tutorial

Analog Output Values

MZ2:1

Digital Output Block/Point Number

Connected Device ID

CL 1 CL 2 CL 3 CL 4

Point Names

1 2 3 4

DIGITAL OUTPUTS:OFF OFF OFF OFF

MIX AIR HT VALVE

Signal

1 2 3 4

ANALOG OUTPUTS: 0.0% 0.0%

50.1%

Digital Output Values

5 6 7 8

FAN OFF

INPUTS:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Universal Input Block/Point Number

OFF OFF 69.4 DEG F

FAN S/S FLOW

ZONE T

Universal Input Values

Graphical Representation of a Digital Value

Graphical Representation of Analog Values

Analog Output Block/Point Number

Analog Inputs as displayed on the PC

Lets take a closer look at the representation of the analog inputs. The analog input values are displayed both in text and in bar chart format. The real time updated text value and its graphical representation are displayed side by side. In this example, the UI range for the bar chart is from 0.0 to 100.0 units. This range applies to all of the displayed analog input values only. It is the intent of this bar chart to be used for monitoring increasing, decreasing, or stable trends.

MZ2:1

ANALOG OUTPUTS:

INPUTS:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF OFF 69.4 DEG F

FAN S/S FLOW

ZONE T

UI RANGE: 0.0 to 100.0

Analog Value Scale0.0 100.025.0 50.0 75.0

69.4

The UI RANGE can be changed by pressing the F1 key. The UI range values can be assigned between -255.0 and 255.0. The MIN value must be less than the MAX value by at least 1.0 for the display to operate properly.


Tutorial

The value assigned as MIN will be the left extent of the bar chart and the value assigned as the MAX will be the right extent of the bar chart. After the values have been assigned, it will be necessary to save the changes, <Alt> S. The values assigned will remain active until they are changed or you exit the PSI program. The range is not displayed on the Current Status screen pressing the F1 key is the only way of verifing the assigned range.

Active digital values will be shown as square boxes. If the box has a dot in its center, it is ON. If the box has no dot, it is OFF.


Relay ON Relay OFF

The real time updated analog output values are displayed both in text and bar chart format. The scale for the bar chart is from 0.0 to 100.0% for all analog output values. This scaling is fixed and cannot be changed. It is the intent of this bar chart to be used for monitoring increasing, decreasing, or stable trends.

The range of 0 to 100% is not displayed on the Current Status screen

The a

ctive digital output values will be shown as square boxes. If the box has a dot in its center, it is ON. If the box has no dot, it is OFF.


Relay ON Relay OFF

Digital Inputs as displayed on the PC

Analog Outputs as displayed on the PC

Digital Outputs as displayed on the PC

CURRENT STATUS display on the ATARI Portfolio

When the ATARI Portfolio is used for viewing the CURRENT STATUS there are five types of displays available to monitor these values. These include:

1. ALL POINTS

2. NAMED INPUTS

3. NAMED OUTPUTS

4. GRAPHICAL INPUTS

5. GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS


Tutorial

By using the ATARI key, you can choose which type of display you wish to view.

ALL POINTS display on the ATARI Portfolio

The ALL POINTS display is the default screen selection. The ALL POINTS display provides a screen with all of the physical input and output values displayed in a text format. Real time updated values will be shown next to their associated point block. The assigned engineering unit will be displayed with the analog values. Digital values will be shown as OFF or ON. Analog outputs will be the OUT attribute values of the AO block and indicated as 0 to 100%. Blocks that are "NOT USED" display values of "--".

Press the ATARI key and choose to view the NAMED INPUTS display. The NAMED INPUTS display provides a screen with all of the physical input values shown with their assigned point names. The real time updated values will be displayed in a text format. The assigned engineering unit will be displayed with the analog values. Digital values will be shown as OFF or ON.

NAMED INPUTS display on the ATARI Portfolio

Press the ATARI key and choose to view the NAMED OUTPUTS display. The NAMED OUTPUTS display provides a screen with all of the physical output values shown with their assigned point names. The real time updated values will be displayed in a text format. Digital values will be shown as OFF or ON. Analog outputs will be the OUT attribute values of the AO block displayed as 0 to 100%.

NAMED OUTPUTS display on the ATARI Portfolio


Tutorial

Analog Output Values

MZ2:001

Digital Output Block/Point Number

Connected Device ID

--- --- ---

CL 1 CL 2 CL 3 CL 4 FAN

Point Name

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DO:1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

MIX AIR HT VALVE Signal

2 3 4

AO:1 0.0% 0.0% 50.1%

Digital Output ValuesAnalog Output Block/Point Number

Point Name

Press the ATARI key and choose to view the GRAPHICAL INPUTS display. The GRAPHICAL INPUTS display provides a screen with all of the physical input values displayed in a graphical format. The real time updated values will be displayed as a bar chart.

GRAPHICAL INPUTS display on the ATARI Portfolio

Connected Device ID


UI:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MZ2:001UI RANGE: 0.0, 100.0

Universal Input Block/Point Number

Graphical Representation of a Analog Value

Analog Value Scale

The scale for the bar chart is indicated at the bottom of the screen. In this example, the range is from 0.0 to 100.0 units. This range applies to all of the displayed analog values. It is the intent of this display to be used to monitor increasing, decreasing, or stable trends.

Note: The Analog Value Scale shown on the next display is not an active part of the display but rather shown for clarification only.

The RANGE for the bar chart can be changed by pressing the ATARI key and selecting 6. RANGE from the Curstat Modes list.

Curstat Modes2. NAMED INPUTS 3. NAMED OUTPUTS 4. GRAPHICAL INPUTS 5. GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS 6. RANGE


Tutorial

The UI range values can be assigned between -255.0 and 255.0. The MIN value must be less than the MAX value for the display to operate properly. The value assigned as MIN will be the left extent of the bar chart and the value assigned as the MAX will be the right extent of the bar chart. After the values have been assigned it will be necessary to save the changes. The values assigned will remain active until they are changed or you exit the PSI program.

UI RANGE:-Parameters-

0.0 100.0

<MIN > <MAX >

Change the MIN value to 50.0 and the MAX value to 90.0. After the values have been changed it is necessary to save (<Alt S>) the changes before the graphical inputs can be viewed with the new bar chart scaling. Return to the GRAPHICAL INPUTS display by pressing the <ESC> key.

UI RANGE:-Parameters-

50.0 90.0

<MIN > <MAX >

Active digital input values will be shown as square boxes. If the box has a dot in its center, it is ON. If the box has no dot, it is OFF.


Relay ON Relay OFF

Press the ATARI key and choose to view the GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS display. The GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS display provides a screen with all of the physical output values displayed in a graphical format. The real time updated analog output values will be displayed as a bar chart.

GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS display on the ATARI Portfolio

The scale for the bar chart is from 0.0 to 100.0% for all analog values. It is the intent of this display to be used to monitor increasing, decreasing, or stable trends.


Tutorial

AO:1 2 3 4

DO:1 2 3 4

MZ2:001

Graphical Representation of a Analog Value

5 6 7 8

Analog Output Block/Point Number

0.0 100.025.0 50.0 75.0

50.1

Active digital output values will be shown as square boxes. If the box has a dot in its center, it is ON. If the box has no dot, it is OFF.


Relay ON Relay OFF

Monitoring Active Point Values using CURRENT STATUS

We will now review the control application AHU-2 and verify its operation using the different CURRENT STATUS monitoring screens. The control loop is set up to provide ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling operation, For details on the ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling operation refer the the section in this manual which describes control LOOPs.

Note: You may want to refer back to the figure.at the begining of this tutorial section which shows the complete diagram of how the blocks are interconnected in the AHU_2 application. The utility blocks below the solid line are used to generate a simulated temperature fluctuation between 50°F and 90°F. The blocks above the solid line are used in the tutorial application.

The temperature signal generator will output approximately 70°F when the FLOW input is OFF. This temperature signal generator will begin ramping after the FLOW input is ON, and continue to ramp (up and down) between 50 and 90°F. When the FLOW input is changed to OFF, the temperature signal generator will continue to ramp for 15 seconds before it returns to its 70°F start point.

If this tutorial is to be preformed with a TAC MICROZONE II controller where the inputs and the outputs have not been wired it will be necessary to OVERRIDE UI:1:OUT1 and UI:2:OUT1 to ON. To accomplish this perform the following steps:

• Press the TAB key to return to the function menu. • Select SYSTEM from the function menu. • Select OVERRIDES. • Select UI:1. • Select FOREVER and ON • Send/Save the override (<Alt>S). • Select UI:2. • Select FOREVER and ON • Send/Save the override (<Alt>S).


Tutorial

• These overrides will remain in affect until they are CLEARED. • Press the TAB key to return to the function menu and select

CURRENT STATUS or press the C key. Note: When viewing the CURRENT STATUS screen you will note

that there is a next to the UI:1 and UI:2 inputs. This indicates that the values are overriden. On a PC, the override is shown as OV next to the assigned point name.

If this tutorial is preformed with a TAC MICROZONE II controller where the inputs and the outputs have been hard wired it will be necessary to turn the fan start/stop switch ON. This is the switch wired, to input 1 (UI:1).

Select the CURRENT STATUS function and review the sequence of operation below for the control application AHU-2 using the different CURRENT STATUS monitoring screens.

AHU Startup and Shutdown Sequence of operation

When the fan is OFF, the mechanical cooling equipment will be OFF, the outdoor air damper will be closed and the heating valve will be shut.

The closing and opening of the manual Fan Switch (UI:1) will start and stop the fan control contactor (DO:5). Note: If the device is not wired, the sequence can be controlled by Overriding the output of the FLOW detect input UI:2 - ON and OFF.

When the fan is running, the air flow sensor (typically a differential pressure switch) will start the control sequence. In this example, the air flow input (UI:2) enables the control loop. The control loop (LOOP:1) is set up to provide ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling operation. The control setpoint is set for 70°F.

Note: The Throttling Range is set at 20°F for the purpose of demonstration only.

Mixed Air Operation

The mixed air damper will respond based on the demand by the space sensor. If the temperature within the zone is at the assigned LOOP setpoint, the damper will be positioned at 50%. If the zone temperature increases, the damper will open increasing the amount of outdoor air mixture with the return air attempting to add cooling to the zone. If the temperature continue to increase and the damper opens to maximum (100% outdoor air) and cooling of the zone can not be achieved, mechanical cooling will be activated.

If the zone temperature decreases, the damper will close decreasing the amount of outdoor air mixture with the return air attempting to decrease the cooling to the zone. If the temperature continues to decrease and the damper closes to its minimum position setting (10% outdoor air) and heating of the zone can not be achieved, mechanical heating will be activated.

Cooling Operation

On a call for cooling (after the mixed air damper is fully open) the first stage of mechanical cooling will be activated. When the


Tutorial

mechanical cooling is activated, the mixed air damper will be positioned at its minimum outdoor air position. If the zone temperature continues to increase, the cooling will be staged on until all four stages have been activated.

Heating Operation

On a call for heating (after the mixed air damper has been closed to its minimum ventilating position), the heating valve will be proportionally opened. If the zone temperature continues to decrease, the heating valve will be opened until it is fully open, then the outdoor air damper will be closed from its minimum ventilating position.

Monitoring Active Values using the TREND Function

The trend function provides an effective method of graphically monitoring a number of values both in relation to one another and over a period of time. Trends can be used to monitor inputs, intermediate operations, and outputs (any block output value). Both analog and digital values can be trended. The trend is an effective tool used to assist in the performance monitoring of controlled points.

There are a number of values that can be monitored in the AHU_2 application using the trend function. First we will monitor the temperature generator signal.

• Select TREND from the function menu.

• The trend setup screen will be displayed.

• Modify the trend parameters and input to represent the following: One input, with a 5 second sample frequency. The signal will be ramping between 50 and 90°F, so the MIN will equal 50.0 and the MAX will equal 90.0. The input attribute (IN1) for the trend will be the output of the universal input block (UI:3:OUT) named ZONE T.

Modified TREND SETUP screens

Note: If this tutorial is to be preformed with a TAC MICROZONE II controller where the inputs and the outputs have not been wired it will be necessary to point the input to UTIL:25:OUT1.

• When the trend has been setup properly, press <Alt> M to monitor the values and save the setup.


Tutorial

The trend monitoring screen will appear and after 5 seconds the first plot will be drawn on the screen. If the plot is a straight line across the mid section of the screen, the fan start/stop switch is OFF and should be switched ON.

The trend will continue to plot samples until it reaches the right extreme of the screen. Each time a new sample is plotted the data will be shifted to the left one segment. With the 5 second per sample frequency assigned, the screen will show a running trend for the last 1 minute and 45 seconds for the Portfolio and the last 2 minutes and 10 seconds for the PC.

MZ2:1

UI:3:OUT (ZONE T )

90.0 85.0 80.0 75.0 70.0 65.0 60.0 55.0 50.0

The PC screen also provides a scaled vertical axis with the bottom limit being the MIN setting and the top limit being the MAX setting.

Press <ESC> to switch back to the trend setup screen.

Next we will take a look at the control outputs of the AHU_2 application as the temperature ramps across its control range. Modify the trend setup to be: Two inputs, with a 2 second sample frequency. The output signals will be controlling between 0 and 100%, so the MIN will equal 0.0 and the MAX will equal 100.0. The input (IN1) for the trend will be the output going to the mixed air damper (AO:1:OUT) and input (IN2) will be the output for the heat valve (AO:2:OUT).


Tutorial

A plot similar to the one shown below will be generated at the time when the temperature at the input is increasing.

MZ2:1 AO:1:OUT

0.0

100.0(MAX )

(MIN )

2 Seconds between samples(FREQ)

AO:2:OUT

Temperature Increasing

The solid line is the output for driving the mixed air damper actuator. The dashed line is the output signal for driving the hot water valve actuator. When the temperature is below 58°F (12°F below the setpoint of 70°F), the outdoor air damper is closed (0%) and heating valve is full open (100%). As the temperature increases, the damper opens to its minimum position (10%). As the temperature continues to increase, the heating valve proportionally closes (from 100 to 0%). As the temperature approaches setpoint, the mixed air damper continues to open. As the temperature passes above the setpoint and continues to increase, the mixed air damper is opened to its maximum (100%). When the first stage of mechanical cooling is energized, the mixed air damper signal is returned to its minimum position. The cooling will continue to stage on until all four stages have been energized. The cooling stages can be monitored by the LEDs located on the controller output termination board. Relay 1 (DO:1) is the first stage of mechanical cooling, relay 2 (DO:2) is the second, relay 3 (DO:3) is the third and relay 4 (DO:4) is the fourth stage of cooling. As the temperature signal ramps down, the sequence is reversed.

Compare test results with the cooling operation shown in the block section under LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2 with cooling.


Tutorial

When running on a PC, the trend function allows for four variables to be plotted simultaneously. In this example, the zone temperature, the mixed air output, the heating value output, and the analog cooling signal were plotted on the same trend screen.

MZ2:1

AO:1:OUT (MIX AIR ) AO:2:OUT (HT VALVE )

100.0

0.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

10.0

30.0

20.0

50.0

40.0

UI:3:OUT (ZONE T ) LOOP:1:AV (Ht/Cl )


Temperature Increasing

Note: The plot lines on the PC will be a combination of solid and dashed lines on monochrome PCs and different colors on PCs with a color monitor. The key for the plot lines is located at the bottom of the screen.

The cooling stages (digital values) can be setup as a trend. Here the first two stages of cooling (DO:1 and DO:2) have been assigned to a trend. Digital values can be displayed with analog values. Therefore, the MIN and MAX values assigned should be selected to cover the analog signal. If the trend is to monitor digital values only, it is important to remember that the MAX value still must have a number assigned to it that is at least one (1.0) greater then the MIN value for the trend to work.

MZ2:1 DO:1:OUT


DO:2:OUT

Temperature Increasing Temperature Decreasing

ONOFF


Tutorial

In the next example, a PC is used to show that the four stages of mechanical cooling can be plotted on one trend screen.

Note: Based on the number of digital values being trended, the screen will be divided up equally with the first digital value displayed on top of any others. The scale on the left is reserved for use with analog values.

Things to try on your own:

• Overrides

With the fan start/stop switch OFF, use the OVERRIDE function to turn on the air handler for a specified time of 15 minutes and monitor the operation for proper shut down.

• Edit

Use the EDIT function and modify the setpoint of the control loop for 75°F. MONITOR (<Alt> M ) the operation in respect to the new control point.

Modify the cooling output for use with a chilled water valve. Practice using the FOLLOW POINTERS function to checkout the application setup. Also, use the MONITOR feature <Alt> M to monitor pointer and output real time values. Use CURRENT STATUS and TRENDS to verify the proper operation of the application.

Apply and test other LOOP configurations.

Try adding some interstage delay at the SEQ block. (The signal generator is fairly fast so you can not add long delay times or you may have to manually force the input values to test the application.)

• Review the HISTORY DATA of the physical points.

Set up and review the point history on the active inputs.


Tutorial

When an application has been completely set up and checked out, it should be uploaded and saved. This is accomplished by:

• Select FILES from the function menu.

• Select GET file.

• Enter the Device Address, 1 in our case.

• The PSI will respond with an information screen indicating that the program is being uploaded. Then a request wanting to know the name you want to assign to the file. Typically you would enter the same name (AHU_2) that was assigned to the file originally.


Save File asAHU_2

Device: MZII #001 <Sec1 Zn2 >

If a file with the same name exists within the PSI database, the response will indicate that a file already exists, and ask if you wish to replace it. A YES response will allow the existing file to be overwritten. A NO response will return you to the "Save File as" screen, here you can change the assigned name. It is important that you keep a backup file of the program in the controller on file.

Files that are not up to date or which have been transferred from another backup media should be deleted. To delete a file:

• Select FILES from the main function menu.

• Select DELETE file.

• Select the file you wish to delete and press Return.


FilesAHU_2 TUTORIAL

Device: MZII #001 <Sec1 Zn2 >

Saving Files

Deleting Files

The following confirmation will appear. Type "Y" for yes and the file will be deleted. Type "N" for no and the file will not be deleted and you will be returned to the file selection window.

Delete file AHU_2QUERY

<Y>es, <N>o

When you are finished with the tutorial you may want to delete the TUTORIAL file and any other files you may have saved as a result of the tutorial.


Tutorial


Programming Basics

Programming Basics

Introduction The TAC MICROZONE II controller is easily applied to a wide variety of mechanical equipment including those that are application specific. Through the use of the PSI software program, control programs can be downloaded to all devices requiring the sequence of operation. The TAC NETWORK 8000 block programming language provides full programmability for easy creation and modification of custom control strategies, and easy duplication of controller databases for mechanical equipment which contain similar or identical control strategies. The TAC NETWORK 8000 block programming concept provides the system operator with total flexibility for the creation of new and unique control strategies without having to be a computer programmer.

• This section on the Programming Basics of the TAC MICROZONE II controller deals with subjects which pertain to the overall operation of the controller. It is hoped that the information presented in this section will help provide a better understanding of how certain functions within the TAC MICROZONE II controller are designed and operate. It also shows the different system configurations in which the controller can operate. The order in which the blocks execute, and detailed descriptions of the block attributes which are common to many of the blocks.

• The numbering system and the methods employed when using control logic in programming control sequences are described. It should be noted that both the capabilities of the numbering system and the way ON/OFF logic functions are performed are different than in the GCM/LCM and should be reviewed.

• This section also describes the device setup parameters which include the device clock (time and date ) operations, the daylight savings time function, and access levels for both on-line and off-line operation.

• And, a brief overview of the OVERRIDE function and the Input/Output data logging techniques using the ALLPOINT HISTORY and the POINT HISTORY functions are provided for reference.

Programming Basics © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. 27

Programming Basics


System Architecture A TAC MICROZONE II controller installation can take many forms.

• A single controller controlling a single or multiple pieces of mechanical equipment.

LCM/MICROZONE II

Access to the controller can be made using the PSI program running in an Atari Portfolio, a Personal Computer, or a Laptop. Interface to the device can be made at the device or at an optional ASD wall sensor.

• A number of controllers, each performing their own standalone control functions networked together on a common ASD (Application Specific Device) bus. (For application limitations see the TAC NETWORK 8000 Hardware Installation Practices F-23061.) The ASD bus allows for many different types of controllers to reside on the same bus. Only one PSI, however, is allowed on the ASD bus at a time.

Access to the controllers can be made using the PSI

program running in either an Atari Portfolio or a Personal Computer. Interface to the device can be made at any of the devices or at any optional ASD wall sensor connected to any of the devices.

In this configuration, data can not be actively shared between devices.

• A number of controllers, networked together on a common ASD bus, each performing their own standalone control functions or providing slave I/O (Input and Output) points for a parent GCM. (For application limitations see the TAC NETWORK 8000 Hardware Installation Practices F-23061.) The ASD bus allows for many different types of controllers to reside on the same bus. Only one PSI, however, is allowed on the GCM's ASD bus at a time.

Programming Basics


program running in either an Atari Portfolio, a Personal Computer, or a Laptop. Interface to the device can be made at any of the devices or at any optional ASD wall sensor connected to any of the devices. Data can be shared between devices via the parent GCM through the use of ZONE2, SGRP blocks in the GCM and the EMS, WINDO, and RGRP blocks in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. Clock synchronization is controlled by the parent GCM. Control strategies within the parent GCM can be interfaced with the ASD controllers.

• A number of parent controllers on a LAN (Local Area Network), networked together to perform as a total integrated building automation system. (For application limitations see the TAC NETWORK 8000 Hardware Installation Practices F-23061.) The ASD bus allows for many different types of controllers to reside on the same bus. Only one PSI, however, is physically allowed on each GCM's ASD bus at a time.


Programming Basics



program running in either an Atari Portfolio or a Personal Computer. Interface to any device can be made at any of the devices or at any optional ASD wall sensor connected to any of the devices. Data can be shared between devices via the parent GCMs. The data is handled through the use of ZONE2, SGRP blocks in the GCM and the EMS, WINDO, and RGRP blocks in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. Data can also be shared across the LAN through the use of the GCM network communication blocks. Clock synchronization is controlled by the parent GCM. Control strategies within the parent GCM and across the TAC NETWORK 8000 LAN can be interfaced with the ASD controllers.

Large systems like this can be further expanded by the addition of a TAC NETWORK 8000 HOST which provides total system monitoring and access. The system may use repeaters to increase the distances and/or number of devices on a LAN or bus. And very large system will have a number of established LANs. (For application limitations see the TAC NETWORK 8000 Hardware Installation Practices F-23061.) The ASD bus allows for many different types of controllers to reside on the same bus. Only one PSI, however, is allowed on each GCM's ASD bus at a time.

Programming Basics


program running in either the HOST, an Atari Portfolio, or a Personal Computer. Interface to any device can be made at any of the devices or at any optional ASD wall sensor connected to any of the devices. Data can be shared between devices via the parent GCMs. The data is handled through the use of ZONE2, SGRP blocks in the GCM and the EMS, WINDO, and RGRP blocks in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. Data can also be shared across the LAN through the use of the GCM network communication blocks. Clock synchronization is controlled by the parent GCM. Control strategies within the parent GCM and across the TAC NETWORK 8000 LAN can be interfaced with the ASD controllers. Points anywhere within the system can be displayed on HOST monitor screens.ASD device databases can be uploaded into the HOST for archiving.


Programming Basics


The Block Programming Concept Programming is the process of creating a sequence of meaningful instructions for a computer. In this case, the computer is the TAC MICROZONE II controller. It is NOT necessary for the programmer to know the detailed inner operation of the computer part of the controller any more than it is necessary for a teenager to understand the intricate workings of an automobile. However, it is necessary that he know some things about the car and its operation. He should know:

1. Its limitations.

2. How to control it.

3. The rules and restrictions governing its use.

In the same way, the programmer of the TAC MICROZONE II must know the limitations of his controller, how to control it, and the rules concerning its use.

More specifically, the programmer needs to understand:

1. How to arrange the SEQUENCE OF INSTRUCTIONS into a logical control algorithm (sequence of control events).

2. How to feed needed DATA INTO the controller.

3. How to check and ensure that the OUTPUT of the sequence of instructions provides the proper results.

The programmer must approach the problem as the controller will see it. He needs to decide what must be done first, and after that is done, what must be done next, and so on. Actually, this is the most important part of programming: the breaking down of a problem into its component parts, arranging these parts in a logical pattern, and then permitting the computer in the controller to perform these parts as a whole control algorithm or sequence of instructions.

Every control algorithm presented involves, (1) information which, (2) is acted upon to, (3) produce results. These are the three parts of a program: INPUT, OPERATION, and OUTPUT. In solving problems, information is acquired through an INPUT; OPERATIONS are performed upon that information; and, the result of the operation is the OUTPUT.

INPUT OPERATION OUTPUT

If we consider what algorithms need to be created to control typical heating, ventilating, air conditioning equipment, and energy management control, we find, (1) that there is a certain set of STANDARD APPLICATIONS we would need - Thermostat Control, Mixed Air Control, Discharge Control with Return Reset, Scheduled On/Off, Optimal Start/Stop, etc., and, (2) some of these routines we will use over and over again: PID Loop Control, Daily Schedules, Holiday Schedules, etc. A set of instructions for the controller to perform each of these operations would need to be designed and written. These routines then need to be checked out and proven operational for the application they are to perform. These routines could be given a

Programming Basicsname and filed in the controller's memory for future use. Then, if we ever need to perform a similar function, all we need to do is make a copy of a proven routine and modify it slightly to perform the new operation.

The functional software (programs) within the TAC NETWORK 8000 controllers are a collection of pretested routines which will perform the standard HVAC and Facility Management control routines.

These routines will be referred to as blocks, blocks of computer instructions (executable code) which will perform these standard control functions. There are also blocks which can be used to interface (input and output) information from hardware sensors, switches, relays, actuators, etc., with the controller's control functions.

Each TAC NETWORK 8000 controller contains a library of these standard control routines (blocks). From this library, we can select the type of block and function we need for each application we need to perform. Once a block's configuration is determined it can be named and certain attributes (modifiable information) within this block can be edited so that it will perform its algorithm (control function) as it should for its unique purpose. The inputs of the block can be assigned. The PARAMETERS (block setup attributes) of the block can be established. The definition given to these PARAMETERS will modify the specific operation of the block for each applied application.

The TAC NETWORK 8000 system's application software within each controller is comprised of a series of predefined blocks of commonly used control and energy management functions.


Programming Basics


TAC MICROZONE II Blocks Each TAC NETWORK 8000 MICROZONE II controller has a complete set of blocks stored in its memory. The programmer can create control sequences by using these blocks and linking them together in such a way that specific control algorithms can be achieved.

The TAC NETWORK 8000 system application software can be graphically described as blocks of executable code written to perform standard control functions. Each application program is made up of a series of predefined (fixed) function blocks. The logical interconnection of these blocks provides the unique applications for energy management and control. The TAC MICROZONE II controller has 13 different block types. Many of these block types can be configured to perform many different functions. The TAC MICROZONE II controller has a total of 69 blocks which are an assortment of the 13 different block types. By changing the interconnections of these blocks, or by adding new blocks to the application program, the user will be capable of modifying the system control algorithms.

The following list contains brief descriptions of each block type. The blocks are presented in alphabetical order based on the type of the block and then by any function or configuration available within that block. The figure that follows these descriptions shows the block types within the TAC MICROZONE II controller.

Analog Output AO - The Analog Output block provides the means of creating an analog value, which is programmable between the range of 0 to 20 ma. current, at one of the physical analog output points. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four (4) AO blocks. Each block is assigned to one of the four analog hardware outputs.

Programming BasicsDigital Output DO - The Digital Output block provides the means of turning a

physical digital output point OFF or ON. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains eight DO blocks. Each block is assigned to one of the eight (8) digital hardware outputs.

EMS Input block EMS- The EMS Input block (Energy Management System) block provides data transfer from the ZONE2 block in the parent GCM (TAC NETWORK 8000 System). The ZONE2 block signals the TAC MICROZONE II that it is in control. At this time the EMS output will go ON and all the EMS output values will be those sent from the parent GCM. If under local control, (EMS = OFF, or loss of ASD communications) the output(s) of the block will be the local input values. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains one (1) EMS block.

Holiday schedule block

HOLI - The Holiday schedule block provides a method of interfacing holiday scheduling with regular time clock scheduling. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains two (2) HOLI blocks.

PID Loop LOOP - The PID Loop block provides Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID) control with eight basic configurations. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four (4) LOOP blocks.

The basic loop configurations include:

Single setpoint / single loop output (ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT)

Dual setpoint / single loop output (TWO SP, COMBINED OUT)

Single setpoint / dual loop output (ONE SP, TWO OUTPUT)

Dual setpoint / dual loop output (TWO SP, TWO OUTPUT)

Offset setpoint / dual loop output (OFFSET SP, TWO OUT)

ASHRAE cycle 1 (ASHRAE CYCLE 1)


ASHRAE cycle 2 with cooling (ASHRAE CYCLE 2/COOL)



Optimum Start Stop block

OSS - The Optimum Start Stop block is a function which is typically applied to HVAC systems, such as air handlers, boilers, and other controlled equipment which are placed in an unoccupied mode. The OSS program automatically starts equipment prior to occupancy at the latest possible moment to achieve desired occupancy conditions at the occupancy time. In some applications, optimum stop may be applied to let the building "coast" at the end of the occupied hours. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four (4) OSS blocks.

Setpoint Reset RESET - The Setpoint RESET block provides a proportional with optional limits for a setpoint adjustment based on a changing independent variable input. For example, the RESET block can be used to calculate a new boiler control setpoint based on a change in the outside air temperature. The range through which the setpoint can be changed can be controlled by the RESET block's output minimum and maximum settings. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains two (2) RESET blocks.

Receive Group Data block

RGRP - The Receive Group Data block provides data transfer from the SEND GROUP DATA block (SGRP) in the parent GCM.


Programming Basics


The GCM "SGRP" block is designed to provide group communications between the TAC NETWORK 8000 building automation system and the TAC MICROZONE II controllers. It is used to transmit information that is commonly used by a group of controllers. Night setback setpoints, unoccupied setpoints, EDL load shedding, smoke detect/purge sequences, etc. are some common uses of the SGRP block. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains one (1) RGRP block.

Schedule block SCHED - The Schedule block provides a method of scheduling regular time clock scheduling. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four (4) SCHED blocks. Each block can have up to eight ON/OFF time period assignments. Each time period has its own active day assignments. Each ON/OFF period can be assigned to one of four outputs. Periods assigned to a common output will be combined together by the OR function. Holiday periods can be interfaced with the active schedules.

Sequence SEQ - The Sequence block provides a user to define up to six digital outputs to be controlled in two modes of sequencing operation: linear and binary. Each mode of operation has an optional interstage delay. Typical linear sequencing applications include staged control of duct heaters, direct expansion cooling, and multiple cooling tower fans. Binary sequencing is often used in providing control of weighted electric heat loads. It can also be used on uneven commercial refrigeration compressor configurations to closely match capacity to required load. The TAC MICROZONE II controller will contain two (2) SEQ blocks.

Universal Input UI - The Universal Input provides the means of reading an analog or digital value connected to one of the physical input points. There are eight (8) universal input points on an TAC MICROZONE II controller. Through the selection of the INPUT TYPE, the block configures the input hardware to interface with the hardware sensors or switches.

ANALOG TYPE

Standard curve types have been set up within the algorithm of the block to include the Balco, Copper, Platinum and TAC 10K Thermistor (850 series) temperature sensors. These sensor inputs provide automatic unit scaling in DEG F and DEG C. Interface to 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA constant current and 0 to 5 VDC signals is also provided. Higher DC voltages, such as, 1 to 11 VDC can be interfaced using a signal conditioner.

DIGITAL TYPE

Configured as a digital type of input, the block provides a means of reading binary data (dedicated contact closure status of a device) into the controller. The block can interface with both normally open and normally closed contacts.

Such contact closures may be from differential pressure switches, flow switches, low temperature stats, contactor auxiliary contacts, or any other dry contact device.

PULSE COUNTER

The INPUT to the POINT is the result of the contacts opening and closing based on a count of quantities, i.e. Gallons/min, etc. The pulse counting configuration provides an output of the

Programming Basicsnumber of pulses counted and totalizes a quantity based on an assigned scaled factor. The pulse counter function will rollover (reset its output values to zero and start counting again) when the output achieves any assigned value up to 255.0 or the device is reset.

Utility block UTIL - The Utility block provides a number of different utilities based on the chosen configuration. The UTIL block can be thought of as 13 different blocks, with inputs and outputs specific to the chosen configuration. The TAC MICROZONE II controller will contain 30 UTIL blocks. The selections include:

Not used (Default) NOT USED

Logic functions LOGIC

Math functions MATH

Selection functions SELECT

Limit function LIMIT

Thermostat function THERMOSTAT

Timer / delay functions TIMER

Momentary Start/Stop function MOMENTARY START/STOP

Drive function DRIVE

Pulse Width Modulation PWM

Flow detect function FLOW

Counter function COUNT

Process alarm PROCESS ALARM

Clock status STATUS

Window block WINDO - The Window block provides a "window view" of analog and digital values within the TAC MICROZONE II controller to the parent controller. The WINDO block provides data transfer to the "ZONE2" block in the GCM. All of the attributes assigned to the WINDO block can be viewed or pointed to at the ZONE2 block in the GCM. Note: All the physical point values, UI:1 thru UI:8, AO:1 thru AO:4, and DO:1 through DO:8 are automatically sent to the ZONE2 block and therefore their is no need to assign I/O block outputs to the window block.


Programming Basics


UI:1

UI:2

UI:3

UI:4

AO:1

AO:2

AO:3

AO:4

DO:1

DO:2

DO:3

DO:4

DO:6

DO:7

SEQ:1

SEQ:2

GCM Interface

LOOP :1

LOOP :2

LOOP :3

LOOP :4

DO:5

UI:5

UI:6

UI:7

UI:8

OSS:1

DO:8

HOLI :1

HOLI :2

SCHED :1

SCHED: 2

SCHED: 3

SCHED :4

RESET:1

RESET:2

LCM/MICROZONE®II

UTIL:1

UTIL:2

UTIL:3

UTIL:4

UTIL:5

UTIL:6

UTIL:7

UTIL:8

UTIL:9

UTIL:10

UTIL:11

UTIL:12

UTIL:13

UTIL:14

UTIL:15

UTIL:16

UTIL:17

UTIL:18

UTIL:19

UTIL:20

UTIL:21

UTIL:22

UTIL:23

UTIL:24

UTIL:25

UTIL:26

UTIL:27

UTIL:28

UTIL:29

UTIL:30

OSS:3

OSS:2

OSS:4

8 Analog Values 8 Digital Values Sends data to the ZONE2 block in GCM.

8 Analog Values 8 Digital Values Receives data from the ZONE2 block in GCM.

8 Digital Values 2 Analog Values Received data from the SGRP block in GCM.

MICROZONE II blocks

Programming Basics

Block execution The controller contains a fixed number and assortment of function blocks. If a block is not used for any purpose it should be selected NOT USED. When a block is designated NOT USED it is skipped over and takes no execution time as the block execution routine is run. This decreases the time in which all the blocks are executed, thus improving the performance of the control algorithms. Setting the block configuration to NOT USED does not reset the attributes to their default. If the block is reconfigured (made used) the attributes will appear in the state they were when the block was made NOT USED.

The calculations are performed as fast as the processor operates. The blocks which are "used" (first parameter set to some configuration other than "NOT USED") are executed in a fixed order.

The order of execution of the configured blocks is as follows:

UI:1 - Universal Input1 thru UI:8 - Universal Input8

HOLI:1 - Holiday 1 thru HOLI:2 - Holiday 2

SCHED:1 - Schedule 1 thru SCHED:4 - Schedule 4

RESET:1 - Setpoint Reset 1 and RESET:2 - Setpoint Reset 2

EMS:1 - EMS block 1

RGRP:1 - Receive Group Data block 1

UTIL:1 - Utility 1 thru UTIL:x*- Utility x*

OSS:1 - Optimal Start/Stop 1 thru OSS:4 - Optimal Start/Stop 4

LOOP:1 - PID Loop:1 thru LOOP:4 - PID Loop:4

SEQ:1 - Sequence :1 and SEQ:2 - Sequence :2

UTIL:x*+1 - Utility x *+1 thru UTIL:30 - Utility 30

WINDOW:1 - GCM Window block:

AO:1 - Analog Output:1 thru AO:4 - Analog Output:4

and then

DO :1- Digital Output:1 thru DO:8- Digital Output:8

The unused blocks will not be calculated.

NOTE: * The number of Utility blocks which will execute before the OSS block. This number is user selectable. The number is assigned as UTILB under the SETUP of the device file.

For the analog input and output the digital to analog converters only physically updates once every 1/2 second. This is the characteristic of the hardware only and does not effect calculated values to the rest of the blocks.

Sequence of operations In some applications it is necessary to control the sequence of calculations and logical operations. These situations require that the order in which the data is operated on and pass to the next operation be controlled. Therefore, select blocks for a control sequence according to the order in which they are executed.


Programming Basics


Basic Block Description Each Block Type is designed to perform a particular function. Each block type is different in what it does; however, the information it acquires through its INPUTS, which is worked on by its function definition (defined by the PARAMETERS) and presented at its OUTPUTS, must meet a common standard so that this information can be shared and used by other blocks. Therefore, each block must conform to a set of standards.

Each of the blocks are broken down into four basic sections: The block TYPE, its NUMBER, its PARAMETERS, its INPUTS, and its OUTPUTS.

The BLOCK TYPE describes basically what function the BLOCK will do. For example: The AO block performs an analog interface between the control program and the physical Analog Output point, the LOOP block performs Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID) control with eight basic configurations, etc. Each of the types was described previously under the subject of the TAC MICROZONE II Blocks

The TAC MICROZONE II has a fixed number of blocks (69), so to identify the different blocks each is numbered. Each is numbered within its type. For example: There are four AO blocks, they are identified as AO:1, AO:2, AO:3, and AO:4. The type and the number is separated by a colon.

Note: Each block when it is configured can be assigned a

unique name. This name can contain up to eight (8) alpha-numeric characters and is assigned to the parameter NAME.

Each block has ATTRIBUTES. These attributes indicate the INPUTS, PARAMETERS, and OUTPUTS of the block. Some of these attributes can be viewed and/or changed under the block EDITOR. The operation of the block relates to a FUNCTION defined by the PARAMETERS with prescribed INPUTS producing OUTPUTS.

Programming BasicsThe block attributes of each block are described with up to 5 characters. These characters are abbreviations for the description of the attribute.

Examples of the ATTRIBUTE Naming Structure (using some of attributes of the AO block illustration above).

BLOCK TYPE : BLOCK NUMBER: ATTRIBUTE (abbrev.).

AO:1:AI Analog input value - The input value that is used to calculate the mA current signal at the output terminals. The relationship between the input value and the output current level is established by the values assigned to the INMN, INMX, OUTMN, and the OUTMX attributes below. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

AO:1:NAME Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the AO block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

AO:1:OUT Output in percent - The OUTMA value as a percentage between the OUTMN and OUTMX values. (Engineering unit = %).

Parameters Parameters define the function of the block. Parameters require 'fixed values.' Fixed values are Numbers, Character Strings, Function Select, Choice of Output State for a certain calculation, etc. These Parameter values do not dynamically change with the operation of the system, but they can be changed by the user through a EDIT. They are rarely changed once the block is configured properly.

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME SUNIT STIME

BLOCK USED MA DAMPR

HOURS 1.0

Inputs An Input can be a 'fixed value' or a 'pointer' (data location

address) to an Output of another block. A Pointer is an attribute


Programming Basics


name of an Output from another block. Input values can be a number or a digital state as defined by the input type.

INPUTS AO: 1AI INMN INMX OUTMN OUTMX

0.0 100.0

4.0 mA 20 .0 mA

LOOP:2:AV

Pointer

Linking Inputs with Outputs where the data types are the same (i.e., analog to analog, digital to digital) is typical, however in the TAC MICROZONE II, data types do not have to match (i.e., analog inputs to digital outputs and digital inputs to analog outputs). For an explanation or this concept see the section on BLOCK INPUTS.

The POINTER concept is a very powerful tool. The Inputs of a block can be POINTED to an Output value of another block. This allows us to 'interconnect' blocks together. Inputs can ONLY POINT to the Outputs of another block, not at other Inputs or Parmeters.

Outputs An Output provides the results of the calculation of the block. A block can have more than one output. All Outputs of a block will be updated to a new current value at the execution frequency. The current values of a block can be either analog values or digital values (ON/OFF).

0 - 100 % MA at terminals

OUT

OUTMA

OUTPUTS

Physical Point

AO x

C

Most outputs will be displayed with the Engineering Units assigned for the block's output, or as defaulted by the blocks function; i.e., the current value of the LOOP BLOCK will always be %; digital outputs will be either ON or OFF, etc.

It all comes together when you choose a block which will perform the function you need and then, by using the EDIT function, you can define the specific function of the block by setting the Parameters. The Inputs can be set to either point at another source of data, or you can assign fixed data.

AO: 1

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME SUNIT STIME

BLOCK USED MA DAMPR

HOURS 1.0

0 - 100 % MA at terminals

OUT

OUTMA

OUTPUTS

Physical Point

AO x

C

INPUTS

AI INMN INMX OUTMN OUTMX

0.0 100.0

4.0 mA 20 .0 mA

LOOP:2:AV

Pointer

Programming BasicsWhen the editing is complete and you save the changes, you have created a functional operation within the controller. Additional blocks can be configured, with their inputs pointed at the outputs of other blocks, so that chained operations can be accomplished.

Example of Block Programming The best way to illustrate the function of how to program using the block EDITOR is by example. In the TUTORIAL section of this manual we described the steps in selecting blocks to complete a simple application. If you have not performed the tutorial, now would be a good time to run through it. Even if you performed the tutorial earlier, now would be a good time to use the application described in the tutorial as a base. By using other blocks, add other functions to the application, modify the application to perform other functions, or create a completely new application.


Programming Basics


Common Block Attributes Some of the same attributes are common to many of the blocks. These are described in detail below. Within the block descriptions these attributes contain a brief summary.

CONFG Block Configuration - In many cases this will configure the block to USED or NOT USED. In some cases there can be more than one configuration type for the block. An example of this is the loop block where different loop configurations can be specified or the UI block where the type of input can be specified. Based on the configuration selected for the block, the attributes are displayed.

To delete a block from the control application or remove it from the block execution list, assign NOT USED as the block configuration.

Note: When a block is assigned as NOT USED and saved, attribute assignments to the block will not be cleared or reset to the default values. The NAME assigned to the block will continue to appear in the block list and if the block is an input or output block, on CURRENT STATUS screens. To delete block names, the name should be replaced with a blank (space). Also, if a previously configured block is "RE-USED," review all of the attributes when re-configuring the block because any old value and pointer assignments will be reactivated unless modified.

NAME Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the block. Each block is identified by type (AO:, UTIL:, LOOP:, etc.) and each block is numbered (AO:3, UTIL:15, LOOP:2, etc.). This name is a label that is attached to the block as a user identifier only. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters plus -/_.<> and spaces. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. The name should not start with the < character. Examples: OA Temp, Fan, Rtn Pump, MA Act, Cl/Ht_A2, DA <Hum>, Rm_203, Flow 3, etc. To delete the block name, the name should be replaced with a blank (space).

SUNIT Sample Unit - This is the unit of time that will be associated to the sample time (STIME) below. The choices are hours, minutes, and seconds. This attribute is associated with AO blocks and UI blocks configured as any analog type of input.

STIME Sample Time - The frequency, in time, that each sample will be taken of the analog value and stored in the history data table for the block. The sample time along with the sample unit determine the length of time between samples. See the POINT HISTORY DATA section for details on the data collected.

UNITS Units - The engineering unit that can be assigned to analog type values. Analog values in many cases can be displayed with some type of engineering unit attached to the value i.e. 57.4 DEG F, 76.9 %, etc. The programmer can select the unit from a list of standard analog types of engineering units.

The list includes:

Programming BasicsNONE - (Assumes analog type, no unit designation will be displayed

with the value.

DIGITAL - Assumes value to be displayed as ON or OFF. If DIGITAL unit is assigned to a value which is analog, the displayed value will indicate ON if the analog value is greater than zero (0.0) and the displayed value will indicate OFF if the analog value is less than or equal to zero (0.0)

DEG F - Automatically scales the displayed values for indication in degrees Fahrenheit.

DEG C, automatically scales the displayed values for indication in degrees Celsius centigrade.

% - Percent.

X.1, X 10, X100, X1000, X10K - Assigned to values which indicates a whole number expressing the number as a power of ten.

IN WC - Inches of water column

K CFM - Kilo cubic feet per minute.

KWH - Kilowatt hour. This is a user definable unit. This unit string can be changed under Data List <SETUP> and is referenced as UNIT1).

GPM -- Gallons per minute. This is a user definable unit. This unit string can be changed under Data List <SETUP> and is referenced as UNIT2).

kPa - KiloPascal. This is a user definable unit. This unit string can be changed under Data List <SETUP> and is referenced as UNIT3).

Lsec - Liters per second. This is a user definable unit. This unit string can be changed under Data List <SETUP> and is referenced as UNIT4).

Note: Only in the case of the Universal Input block does the selection of Engineering Units have any effect on the values being displayed. When the Input Type selected is Thermistor, Copper, Platinum, or Balco, the DEG F and DEG C selection automatically scales the displayed values. If any other selection is made, i.e. Volts or %, the value is displayed in the DEG F equivalency.

Selecting DIGTL as the units for any block causes the outputs to appear as ON or OFF. Any other selection cause the outputs to be displayed as analog and in the X.X numeric format. Digital values are always displayed as ON or OFF.


Programming Basics


Time and Date The TAC MICROZONE II controller, based on model, is available with or without a clock. The controllers with a clock contain a fully battery backed up time of day clock and calendar. The controllers without a clock contain a system day clock which will not retain its time if the controller is reset unless it is connected to a parent GCM on the ASD bus. A reset will occur if the controller has a power interruption or a "Reset Device" command is issued from the PSI.

Devices with Clock

The time and date at the device is checked and set from the PSI through the SYSTEM - TIME & DATE function. For devices on an ASD bus WITH a parent GCM, the time and date at the device is synchronized with the time & date within the parent GCM. If for some reason communication between the GCM and the ASD device is disrupted the clock within the ASD device will continue to maintain the clock supported functions until the communication is restored. When communication is restored the GCM will synchronize the clock if necessary.

Note: The battery backup is only active if the insulator is removed from under the battery clip. The lithium battery has an unused ten year shelf life. This battery will maintain the clock whenever the controller is not powered for a period of 30 days of total usage.

Devices without Clock

Controller models without clocks have all the same control functions as the controllers with clocks. They can perform time of day scheduling, optimum starting and stopping the control strategies, etc. HOWEVER, because these controllers do not have the battery backup function, each time the controller is reset the current time and the date will be lost. This means that if the time of date functions are used within the control strategies they should be used with special consideration. Some things to consider are:

Devices on an ASD bus WITH a parent GCM will receive the time and date for the device from the parent GCM. If for some reason communication between the GCM and the ASD device is disrupted, the clock within the ASD device will continue to maintain the clock supported functions until the communication is restored. When communication is restored the GCM will synchronize the clock if necessary.

Stand alone devices can have the system time clock set from the PSI through the SYSTEM - TIME & DATE function. The system day clock and calendar function normally until the controller is reset. A reset will occur if the controller has a power interruption or a "Reset Device" command is issued from the PSI. When the controller is reset, the system day clock and calendar revert to its default value. When the system is restored, the system day clock and calendar will begin form the default values. The correct time and date will have to be

Programming Basicsrestored from the PSI. When the time clock is reset the "time is invalid" flag will be set.

When the "time is invalid" flag is set, the UTIL block with the STATUS function enabled will provide an OFF output until the time and date is restored from the PSI. In addition. when the "time is invalid" flag is set, the SCHED and HOLI blocks will output their assigned default values until the time and date is restored from the PSI.

Valid and invalid time conditions.

1. TAC MICROZONE II controller without a time clock, not connected to a GCM via the ASD bus (stand alone controller).

• The time will be invalid until a SYNCRONIZE CLOCKS is commanded through a PSI or other parent controller.

• If the clocks are synchronized, the system clock within the TAC MICROZONE II controller will keep accurate time while the device is powered up. The time will be valid until the device is reset, power fails, or a power glitch is experienced which clears the RAM of its active values.

2. TAC MICROZONE II controller without a time clock, connected to a GCM via the ASD bus.

• The time will be invalid until a SYNCRONIZE CLOCKS is commanded through the PSI or communications is established with the parent GCM.

• The system clock within the TAC MICROZONE II controller will keep accurate time while the device is powered up. The time will be valid until the device is reset, power fails, or a power glitch is experienced which clears the RAM of its active values and communications with the parent GCM is interrupted.

• The time will be valid again upon establishing communications with the parent GCM.

3. TAC MICROZONE II controller with a time clock, not connected to a GCM via the ASD bus (stand alone controller).

• The time is invalid if the memory is corrupted in some way and the time value is outside of the excepted range of values i.e. 82:75:01.

• The time is invalid if the battery is dead and the clock was not able to keep the correct time when the device is reset, power fails, or a power glitch is experienced which clears the RAM of its active values.

• The time will be valid if the device is reset, power fails, or through power glitches if the battery is not dead. Note: If the battery is marginal and the device is reset, power fails, or the power glitches,


Programming Basics


the time may be valid but not necessary correct until the clock is synchronized as stated below.

4. TAC MICROZONE II controller with a time clock, connected to a GCM via the ASD bus.

• The time is invalid if the memory is corrupted in some way and the time value is outside of the excepted range of values i.e. 82:75:01.

• The time is invalid if the battery is dead and the clock was not able to keep the correct time when the device is reset, power fails, or a power glitch is experienced which clears the RAM of its active values.

• The time will be valid if the device is reset, power fails, or through power glitches if the battery is not dead. Note: If the battery is marginal and the device is reset, power fails, or the power glitches, the time may be valid but not necessary correct until a SYNCRONIZE CLOCKS is done through the PSI or communications is established with the parent GCM.

The STATUS function within the UTIL block provides a monitor of the time conditions within the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The output of the UTIL block configured for the STATUS function will be ON unless an invalid time is detected. The output will be OFF for as long as an invalid time condition remains. In all cases, it is recommended that a UTIL block with the STATUS function be used to provide safe fallback for conditions where the time is invaid.

OUT 1

CONFG

NAME

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

STATUS

IN1 IN2 SLECT

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 2

OUT2

Fallbank value

OFF (invalid time)

If the time is determined to be invalid the UTIL:1:OUT1 value will be OFF and UTIL:2 select function will switch to the fallback value.

Normal operation signal

Control signal (Valid time = signal from IN2, Invalid time = signal from IN1)

Programming Basics

System Resets System Reset means that something has happened that causes the program within the controller to initialize and start over. A System Reset can be manually forced or it can be caused by accidental happening like a power glitch or a temporary power interruption.

There are a number of different ways that a reset will be initialized. They are:

Power Failure Reset

The most common type of System Reset that may occur will be due to a temporary power interruption. This can happen because of an electrical storm or other natural disaster, or a shut off of the distribution circuit. When power is removed from the controller for a period of time, the controller will be restarted based on a what is called a "cold reset". With a cold reset:

• The relays will de-energize and be in their Normally Closed state.

• The Analog Outputs will be at 0.0 mA .

• All the blocks output values will be cleared. All accumulated data will be lost i.e. the TOTAL output of the UTIL Counter function will be zeroed.

• The POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY data will be lost.

• All overrides will be cleared.

• Time may or may not be valid.

• The startup delay will be put into effect.

When the power is restored, the program will initialize. All the relay outputs will remain in their Normally Closed state. All the Analog Outputs will be at 0.0 mA . The Universal Inputs will be configured as designated. After the startup delay, the blocks will begin executing according to the order of block execution. Any control function featuring ramp on reset or timing functions i.e. delay times, etc. will be in effect. Minimum OFF timers will be reset and must time out before operating. Blocks like the UTIL Counter function will start accumulating data. Data for the ALLPOINTS HISTORY will begin to be accumulated. All overrides that were in effect before the reset are cleared.

Momentary Power Glitch Reset

A short power interruption may cause the program to reset. But if the power returns before the power supply drops below the "cold reset" threshold, certain data will not reset or cleared. The controller will be restarted based on a what is called a "warm reset". With a warm reset:



• The accumulated data will be retained i.e. the TOTAL output of the UTIL Counter function will be


Programming Basics


zeroed. All the UTIL Timer blocks are reset to start over.

• The POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY data will be retained.

• The overrides in effect will not be reset.

• Time will not be disturbed.


With a warm reset, all the relay outputs will remain in their Normally Closed state. All the Analog Outputs will be at 0.0 mA . The Universal Inputs will be configured as designated. After the startup delay, the blocks will begin executing according to the order of block execution. Any control function featuring ramp on reset or timing functions i.e. delay times, etc. will be in effect. Minimum OFF timers will be reset and must time out before operating. Blocks like the UTIL Counter function will continue accumulating data. The POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY will continue accumulating data. All overrides that were in effect before the reset will remain in effect.

Sending a New File to a Device

Whenever a File is sent (downloaded) to a controller, a System Reset will be initialized. As the program is being downloaded all of the controllers outputs are "frozen" (held at their present condition) until the new program is completely loaded. Then the controller will be restarted (thawed) based on a what is called a "cold reset." With a cold reset:






• Time will be valid.


When the controller is thawed, the program will initialize. All the relay outputs will remain in their Normally Closed state. All the Analog Outputs will be at 0.0 mA . The Universal Inputs will be configured as designated. After the startup delay, the blocks will begin executing according to the order of block execution. Any control function featuring ramp on reset or timing functions i.e. delay times, etc. will be in effect. Minimum OFF timers will be reset and must time out before operating. Blocks like the UTIL Counter function will start accumulating data. Data for the POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY will begin to be accumulated. All overrides that were in effect before the reset are cleared.

Programming Basics

Reset Button

Pushing the reset button on the controller will cause the program to reset. The controller will be restarted based on a what is called a "warm reset." With a warm reset:



• The accumulated data will be retained i.e. the TOTAL output of the UTIL Counter function will be zeroed. All the UTIL Timer blocks are reset to start over.

• The POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY data will be retained.



• Time will not be disturbed.


With a warm reset, all the relay outputs will remain in their Normally Closed state. All the Analog Outputs will be at 0.0 mA . The Universal Inputs will be configured as designated. After the startup delay, the blocks will begin executing according to the order of block execution. Any control function featuring ramp on reset or timing functions i.e. delay times, etc. will be in effect. Minimum OFF timers will be reset and must time out before operating. Blocks like the UTIL Counter function will continue accumulating data. The POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY will continue accumulating data. All overrides that were in effect before the reset will remain in effect.

PSI Reset

Using the System Reset Function Under SYSTEM RESET The controller will be restarted based on a what is called a "cold reset." With a cold reset:





Programming Basics




• Time may or may not be valid.

When the PSI sends the reset command to the controller, the program will initialize. All the relay outputs will remain in their Normally Closed state. All the Analog Outputs will be at 0.0 mA . The Universal Inputs will be configured as designated. After the startup delay, the blocks will begin executing according to the order of block execution. Any control function featuring ramp on reset or timing functions i.e. delay times, etc. will be in effect. Minimum OFF timers will be reset and must time out before operating. Blocks like the UTIL Counter function will start accumulating data. Data for the POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY will begin to be accumulated. All overrides that were in effect before the reset are cleared.

Block Reset <Alt> R

When in the EDIT DEVICE mode, you can force a reset an individual block. You may want to reset the TOTAL output of the UTIL Counter function or reset a delay block. This type of reset can be accomplished in two ways. 1) By sending/saving the block to a device the block will re-initialize in the controller. 2) By using the <Alt> R key combination when the editing a block in the DEVICE EDIT mode of the PSI. This reset will:

• Clear all the block output values. If the block contains accumulated data, it will be lost. (i.e. the TOTAL output of the UTIL Counter function will be zeroed).

• Clear any overrides in effect for this block.

• Clear the POINT HISTORY and ALLPOINTS HISTORY data for this block.

When a block is sent/saved to a device, the next time that block is executed it will execute based on the new configuration.

Programming Basics

Number system All data (values) that are passed between the blocks or worked upon within the calculations of the blocks are numbers. Analog values are expressed at numbers between - 255.00 and +255.00. All digital states are assigned a number with OFF equaling 0.0 and ON equaling 100.0.

The numbering system within the TAC MICROZONE II controller is limited to numbers between - 255.00 and +255.00. The resolution is ± 1/32 or .03, examples: repeats/minute = .00, .03, .06, etc. 79.97, 80.00, 79.03, etc.

The range for calculations cannot exceed a ∆ of 255.00. For example: -100.00 to 155.00 is acceptable, -100.00 to 200.00 is not acceptable. If the range is exceeded, values are limited to the highest or the lowest value allowed (±255.00). This is important to remember when scaling the Universal Input blocks and using the MATH functions. Calculations performed by the MATH functions exceeding these limits (∆ of 255.00) will result in errors as illustrated below.

AdditionOUT1 = (Analog Input 1 + Analog Input 2) + Analog Input 3 where: AI1 = 200.0 AI2 = 100.0 AI3 = -10.0 OUT1 = (AI1 + AI2) +AI3 OUT1 = (200.0 + 100.0) + (-10.0) OUT1 = (255.0) + (-10.0). The first calculation is limited to 255.0. OUT1 = 245.0. The result is 245.0 instead of the 290.0.


Programming Basics


Block Inputs All data (values) that are passed between the blocks are numbers. Analog values are expressed at numbers between - 255.00 and +255.00. All digital states are assigned a number with OFF equaling 0.0 and ON equaling 100.0. Therefore, all inputs to the blocks are universal. This means that an input can be assigned either analog or digital values. Now this may not appear true when you try to assign fixed values to inputs because the MMI (Man Machine Interface) in the PSI program will only allow Analog numbers to be assigned where the inputs are known to be analog types and ON and OFF where the inputs are known to be digital types. However, you will find that you can assign pointers, to inputs, that are either analog or digital outputs.

Analog Inputs Inputs that are designed to receive analog values can be assigned fixed numbers between -255.0 to +255.0.

Analog values displayed with the PSI are in increments of 0.1. Analog values sent to the parent GCM through the use of the WINDO block will be in increments of 0.01.

Analog Pointers Inputs (analog types) can be pointed at digital values. A digital value of OFF will equal zero (0.0). A digital value of ON will equal +100.0.

Analog Input Inversion Inputs with pointers (input assigned to get its value from the output of another block) can be "inverted." This means that if an input is pointed to an output of a block that is a numeric value and the input is set to "inverted" the block reads this value as the value multiplied by -1 where zero equals zero. For example: 123 inverted will = -123, 23.98 inverted will = -23.98, 0 = 0, -0.01 inverted will = 0.01.

Pointers can be inverted by the following steps:

In the PSI, under EDIT (Device or File) select the block where the input is. After a pointer has been assigned to the input, with the cursor at the input pointer, press <Alt> I to invert the pointer. The pointer designation will be preceded with a minus (-) sign indicating the inversion (i.e. -UI:2:OUT). To remove the inversion from inputs, place the cursor at the inverted input pointer, press <Alt> I to re-invert the pointer.

Digital Inputs Inputs that are designed to receive digital values can be fixed at either ON or OFF.

Digital Pointers Inputs (digital types) can be pointed at analog values. An analog value greater than zero (0.0) equals ON. An analog value less than or equal to zero (0.0) equals OFF. An analog value of zero equals OFF.

Digital Input Inversion Inputs with pointers (input assigned to get its value from the output of another block) can be "inverted." This means that if an input is pointed to an output of a block that is ON and the input is set to "inverted" the block will reads this ON value and treat it as an OFF value.

Instructions on how to invert the pointer, see Analog Input Inversion above.

Programming Basics

Device Setup

<OVTIL> <UTILB> <DELAY> <GROUP> <UNIT1> <UNIT2> <UNIT3> <UNIT4> <DEVIC> <APPL>

12:00AM 15

0 1

KWH GPM kPa

Lsec MZ II NONE

SEC

Edit Block: -SETUP- -Parameters- The device setup parameters are the system setup data for the

device to which this program is to reside. This system data is used for functions which will be commonly used throughout the device and its operation. These include functions like the global override until time, the number of utility blocks which will be executed before the loop blocks, the assigned group number, any user defined engineering units, the assigned device name, the user defined application name, and the daylight savings time operation selection and its associated setup.

These device system functions are defined as follows:

<OVTIL> Global Override Until Time (Time of Day). The default is 12:00AM or 00:00 depending on the time format setup for the PSI. Each device is allowed one time that overrides can last until. Each block which has an Until override will be overridden at the override value until the device time reaches the time specified unless the device is reset. See the section on Overrides detailed later in this manual.

<UTILB> Utility Blocks Input Quantity. 15 blocks is the default; values between 0 and 30 are acceptable. This specifies the number of Utility blocks (out of 30) that will be executed before the OSS, LOOP, EMS, WINDOW, RGRP, and SEQ blocks. The remaining utility blocks will be executed after these blocks.

<DELAY> Startup Delay. 0 SEC is the default. Values between 0 and 255 seconds are acceptable. DELAY is the time after power down or reset that the device must remain inactive. The actual time it takes for the unit to become active is the delay time plus approximate 15 seconds for the unit to run its startup diagnostic tests. This can be especially useful during power failure to eliminate startup of several large loads at the same time by staggering the startup of different ASD devices.

<GROUP> The default group number is 1. Values between 1 and 254 are acceptable. Groups are used when communicating with a GCM. The SGRP block at the GCM communicates with the RGRP block in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. Several devices can be set up in groups to share the same control information from the GCM.

<UNIT1>, <UNIT2>,

<UNIT3>, <UNIT4>

These are four user definable unit types that can be used by the device. The defaults are KWH, GPM, kPa, and Lsec respectively. The limit is 5 characters.

<DEVIC> Device name. The default is MZ II This is the device name that appears in the status line of the PSI. The limit is 8 characters. Examples: Area 4, AHU-2, FL3 SEC4, Unit B-3.

<APPL > This is the application note. This can be used for a short discriptor which may identify the person who designed the application, the date the program was commissioned, or some other helpful information. The limit is 8 characters. The default is blank.


Programming Basics


<DLSTP> This is the daylight savings time operation for the ASD controller. This feature should only be used with stand alone ASD devices with a time clock not under a GCM. The choices are DISABLED, FIXED DATE, and FORMULA DATE. The default is DISABLED. When daylight savings time is disabled there is no daylight savings time feature.

The TAC MICROZONE II controller is capable of self adjusting its system clock during daylight saving time periods. The device provides two methods for changing the time.

The first method is by a fixed date. The fixed date method is used when the change is on the same date every year at the same time.

The second method is by a formula date. With this method a formula is used to determine the exact day daylight saving goes into effect based on a particular day of a particular week within a particular month. This method can be used every year that the assigned formula is correct for.

Fixed Date

FIXED DATE

01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM

01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM

<DLSTP> <AHDDT> <AHDFT> <AHDTT> <BAKDT> <BAKFT> <BAKTT>

Edit Block: -SETUP-

Choosing FIXED DATE allows daylight savings time to be setup to change on the same date every year at the same time.

<AHDDT> Set Ahead Date. This is the date when the controllers clock should be set ahead to the new time. The default is 01/01.

<AHDFT> Set Ahead From Time. The time of day that daylight savings time transfer should occur. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

<AHDTT> Set Ahead To Time. The time of day that it is to become the new time once daylight savings goes into effect. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

<BAKDT> Set Back Date. This is the date when the controllers clock should be set back to the new time. The default is 01/01.

<BAKFT> Set Back From Time. The time of day that daylight savings time transfer should occur. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

<BAKTT> Set Back To Time. The time of day that it is to become the new time once daylight savings goes into effect. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

Formula Date

Choosing FORMULA DATE allows daylight savings time to be setup to change on the same day of the week of a particular month every year at the same time. With this method a formula is used to determine the exact day daylight saving goes into effect based on a particular day of a particular week within a particular month.

FORMULA DATE 2nd MO FEB

12:00AM 12:00AM

2nd MO FEB 12:00AM 12:00AM

<DLSTP> <AHDDT> <AHDFT> <AHDTT> <BAKDT> <BAKFT> <BAKTT>

Edit Block: -SETUP-

Programming Basics<AHDDT> Set Ahead Date. This is the date when the controllers clock

should be set ahead to the new time. The choices are 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th. The default is 1ST SUN JAN. If set to the 5th, the last day of that type for the month will be used.

<AHDFT> Set Ahead From Time. The time of day that daylight savings time transfer should occur. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

<AHDTT> Set Ahead To Time. The time of day that it is to become the new time once daylight savings goes into effect. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

<BAKDT> Set Back Date. This is the date when the controllers clock should be set back to the new time. The choices are 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th. The default is 1ST SUN JAN. If set to the 5th, the last day of that type for the month will be used.

<BAKFT> Set Back From Time. The time of day that daylight savings time transfer should occur. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.

<BAKTT> Set Back To Time. The time of day that it is to become the new time once daylight savings goes into effect. The default is 12:00AM or 00:00.


Programming Basics


User Access Users and passwords are used to control the individuals who can access the PSI program and the TAC MICROZONE II controllers. Access levels are used to control the functions that can be exercised by the user.

In order for a user to access a device they must have a matching username and password in both the PSI and the device.

To add users to the PSI and/or a device you must be logged on to the PSI with a username and password with an access level of six (6). To accomplish this on a new system, access the PSI with the default username (USER) and password (PASS) and enter all the new usernames and passwords that will be required under the PSI SETUP function.

PSI Setup - Version x.x

<OVTYP> <OVTIM> <TMFMT> <ADDR > <BAUD > <COMMP> <USR1 > <PAS1 > <LEV1 > <USR2 > <PAS2 > <LEV2 > <USR3 > <PAS3 > <LEV3 > <USR4 > <PAS4 >

UNTIL 2

AM/PM 1

9600 COM1: USER PASS

6 6JOHN BR549

3

0

-Parameters-Functions

CURRENT STATUS EDIT SYSTEM TREND DEVICE NUMBER NODE LIST FILES ALLPOINTS HISTORY PSI SETUP

Assigning users, passwords, and access levels to the PSI SETUP. (PC Screen Shown.)

MIN

For details on setting up user access in the PSI see the PSI Programmers Manual F-23117.

After choosing an existing file, creating a new file, or accessing a device the following screen appears: The parameters for -ACCESS- sets up the device (the controller where the file will reside) with the usernames and passwords along with access levels for the device. Eight usernames and passwords are allowed per device.

Note: Before deleting the default username and password

make sure there is another username and password with an access level of 6. If there is not a level 6 access entered users cannot be added or deleted.

Programming BasicsThe parameters for -ACCESS- are defined as follows:

<USER1> The default is USER. The limit is 6 characters. The username can contain up to 6 alpha-numeric characters plus -/_.<> and spaces. The alpha characters can be entered in either upper or lower case. The name should not start with the < character.

<PASS1> The default is PASS. The limit is 6 characters. The password can contain up to 6 alpha-numeric characters plus -/_.<> and spaces. The alpha characters can be entered in either upper or lower case. The name should not start with the < character.

<LEVL1> The default is 6 Access level assignment for user 1. Values between 0 and 6 are acceptable. Function availability at each access level for both on-line and off-line operation is shown in the following two charts. Assigning an access level of zero (0) will not provide any access.

There are seven more username and password combinations that are allowed at the device. These can be set up with any combination of user name, password and access level. Always keep a level 6 access for the supervisor of the system so he can change usernames, passwords and access levels.


Programming Basics


Not Applicable for Off Line Operation

Edit/Add Users, Passwords, and Access Levels


-View /Edit device setup attributes.

VIEW ALL POINTS VIEW NAMED INPUTS VIEW NAMED OUTPITS VIEW GRAPHICAL INPUTS VIEW GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS RANGE (Available once VIEW GRAPHICAL INPUTS is selected)

6CURRENT STATUS

EDIT

SYSTEM

TREND

DEVICE NUMBER

NODE LIST

FILES

PSI SETUP

-SETUP- -ACCESS- EMS:1 WINDO:1

OVERRIDES TIME&DATE DIAGNOSTICS RESET

GET SEND COPY DELETE

1 2 3 4 5

-SETUP- -ACCESS- All Blocks

DEVICE

FILE-SETUP- -ACCESS- View/Edit all blocks

FUNCTIONFEATURE

ACCESS LEVELS

No Editable Attributes at this Access Level

Feature Available at all Levels (Used to access device)

OPERATOR LEVELS PROGRAMMER LEVELS

View and Edit all setups except USERNAME

Access Device OperationsNo Access at this level

Make a Copy of a Configured File Delete a Configured File

PSI Access Levels Off Line Operations






Feature Available at all Levels (Used to View Common Devices on bus and access device)

View PC Time and Date Only

ALLPOINTS HISTORY (PC Only) Feature Available at all Levels (Used to access device)

This chart illustrates what functions are available at each access level when using the PSI in an off-line mode of operation (not communicating with a TAC MICROZONE II controller). Off-line operation would be used the creation and review of control programs. These control programs (files) can be later downloaded into a device in an on-line operation.

Programming Basics

All features available at all levels


-View/Edit device access attributes

-View /Edit device setup attributes.

VIEW ALL POINTS VIEW NAMED INPUTS VIEW NAMED OUTPUTS VIEW GRAPHICAL INPUTS VIEW GRAPHICAL OUTPUTS RANGE (Available once VIEW GRAPHICAL INPUTS is selected)

6

-View and Edit

CURRENT STATUS

EDIT

SYSTEM

TREND

DEVICE NUMBER

NODE LIST

FILES

-SETUP- -ACCESS- EMS:1 WINDO:1

OVERRIDES TIME&DATE DIAGNOSTICS RESET

GET SEND COPY DELETE

1 2 3 4 5

All Current Status features available at all levels

-View/Edit device setup attributes

-SETUP- -ACCESS- All Blocks

DEVICE

FILE

-Edit personal PASSWORD -View device setup attributes

-View and Edit -View only

-SETUP- -ACCESS- View/Edit all blocks

View onlyAll features available at all levels

FUNCTIONFEATURE

ACCESS LEVELS

-View/Edit all blocks plus ALL POINT HISTORY for inputs and Outputs

No Editable Attributes at this Access Level

Override Outputs of configured blocksView and Syncronize Clocks

Reset the Device

Upload Files from the device Download Configured Files

OPERATOR LEVELS PROGRAMMER LEVELS

Off Line Operations

Make a Copy of a Configured File Delete a Configured File

PSI and LCM/MICROZONE II Access Levels (Off-line and On-line operation)

Feature Available at all Levels (Used to access device)

Feature Available at all Levels (Used to View Common Devices on bus and access device)


PSI SETUP View and Edit all setups except USERNAME

No Access at this level

ALLPOINTS HISTORY (PC Only) Feature Available at all Levels (Used to access device)

This chart illustrates what functions are available at each access level when using the PSI in an on-line mode of operation (communicating with a TAC MICROZONE II controller). Off-line operations (operations not requiring communicating with a TAC MICROZONE II controller) are also indicated. Access levels up to four are recommended for operators who will mainly be assigned the task of monitoring the operation of the device. Levels five and six are recommended for operators who have an indepth understanding of the control sequence and the control program. This person my be called upon to alter or add to the control sequences. These levels are also reserved for those programmers who will be creating and checking out new control strategies.


Programming Basics


Override The override function is an operator function in the PSI program. A detailed description of overrides is provided in the PSI TAC MICROZONE II Operators Manual F-23058; however, a brief overview is presented here as reference information for the programmer.

The TAC MICROZONE II controller allows the user to directly control the output values of individual blocks by the use of the override, without changing the programming of the device. The override function allows the user to select a particular block and assign the output values. These values will remain in effect for that block until they are cleared. Depending on the type of override chosen, they can be cleared automatically or manually.

Note: When a block is overridden, all the outputs of the block are frozen at their current values The user may then define the values for each output.

Blocks AO:1 <SETPOINT> AO:2 < > AO3 < > AO:4 < > DO:1 < >

Digital values can be forced to either on or off. Analog values can be forced to any value within their range (usually -255.0 to 255.0). All overrides will last for their designated time or until the device is reset or a power failure occurs. Once the override is removed, the block will return to its current calculated value.

After choosing SYSTEM - OVERRIDES, a block listing is displayed. Select the block which is to be overridden. Blocks can only be overridden after they have been configured. There are three (3) types of overrides that the TAC MICROZONE II offers.

The first is a Timed override. A Timed override can last for 1 to 254 minutes. The timer starts when the override is sent to the device and continues until time has expired.

Timed Overrides

Note: Because the timer in the ASD device only recognizes a minute when the time clock reaches a new minute it is possible for a timed override to last up to 59 seconds longer than anticipated.

The next type of override is an Until override. Choosing Until overrides the block until the designated time. Each device is allowed one time (under Setup <OVTIL>) to which all blocks can be overridden. In this way several blocks can be overridden to the same time and become simultaneously functional again.

Until Overrides

The third type of override is a Forever override. As its name implies this override continues forever or until it is cleared. A commanded reset of the device or a power failure will also clear this type of override.

Forever Overrides

Clear Overrides After an override has been established it can be removed at any time by choosing Clear. Clearing an override will remove the override value and return the block to its previous state.

Programming Basics

Point History Log The Point History Log is described in detail in the PSI TAC MICROZONE II Operators Manual F-23058, however, a brief overview is presented here as reference information for the programmer. The Point History Data can be a useful tool during the set up and checkout of a system. Properly set up during the programming process, the Point History Data can be a source of information when called upon to service the system.

The TAC MICROZONE II controller provides a method of reviewing the past history of each physical point. The data logged for each point can show changes in the control system over a period of time. It can inform the user as to the frequency that certain equipment has been turned ON and OFF within the system. This can be effective data when servicing equipment or checkout at installation.

Analog points, each can be assigned a frequency at which running samples should be collected. A running log of the last 48 samples will be maintained until the device is reset.

Digital points will provide a running log of the date and time of the last 10 changes of state for each digitally defined input point and each digital output point.

The log can be reviewed with the PSI when a particular point block is displayed in the DEVICE EDIT function.

Points History Data

The attributes used to establish to sample time for analog points are <SUNIT> and <STIME>. SUNIT is the sample unit and can be SECONDS, MINUTES, or HOURS. STIME is the sample time and can be any value from 1.0 to 255.0. The point history data will be logged with the time, the date and the value. The TAC MICROZONE II controller will log the last 48 analog samples.

For digital point blocks, the time and date of a change of state is logged. This is logged with the time, the date, and the state change (ON or OFF). The last 10 change of states will be logged

It is recommended that when a control strategy is set up that the values assigned for the sample units and time for each input and output be assigned based on returning meaningful information.

For example: The sample rate for an analog input monitoring outdoor air might be once an hour which will return a two day history of the outdoor air temperature (48 samples) or a sample every half hour will return a 24 hour history of the outdoor air temperature. The sampling rate for the inputs and outputs of a common air handler might be assigned at every two minutes to provide an 11

2 hour of history of the changes in the temperatures and controlling outputs.


Programming Basics


BLOCKS - General

BLOCKS - General

The following sections contain detailed descriptions of the blocks used in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. These descriptions show a block diagram and include a description of each of the block's attributes. Also included is information on how to apply the block. The blocks are presented in alphabetical order based on the type of the block and then by any function or configuration available within that block.

The block/function list Quantity Block Type Description

4 AO Analog Output

8 DO Digital Output

1 EMS EMS Input block

2 HOLI Holiday schedule block

4 LOOP PID Loop

(LOOP functions)

Single setpoint, Dir/Rev output

Two setpoints, combined output

Single setpoint, Two outputs

Two setpoints, Two outputs

Offset setpoint, Two outputs

ASHRAE Cycle 1

ASHRAE Cycle 2

ASHRAE Cycle 2 with cooling

ASHRAE Cycle 3

ASHRAE Cycle 3 with cooling

2 OSS Optimum Start Stop block

2 RESET Setpoint Reset

1 RGRP Receive Group Data block

4 SCHED Schedule block

2 SEQ Sequence

8 UI Universal Input

Blocks © Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved. 65

BLOCKS - General

Quantity Block Name Description

30 UTIL Utility

(UTIL functions)

Logic function

Math function

Selection function

SWITCH

HIGH/LOW

LOOP INVERT

Limit function

Thermostat function

Timer function

DUAL DELAY (1 input dual delay)

DUAL MIN (1 input dual min)

MIN OFF (2 inputs MIN OFF)

MIN ON (2 inputs MIN ON)

OFF DELAY (2 inputs OFF delay)

ON DELAY (2 inputs ON delay)

Momentary Start / Stop function

Drive function

Flow detect function

Counter function

Process Alarm

Status

Pulse Width Modulation function

1 WINDO Window block

66 © Copyright 2008TAC. All Rights Reserved. F-23118-2

AO

AO - Analog Output Block

The AO block provides the means of creating an analog value, which is programmable between the range of 0 to 20 ma. current, at one of the physical analog output points. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four AO blocks. Each block is assigned to one of the four analog hardware outputs.

AO-Analog Output configuration

Attributes Parameters

CONFG - Block configuration - Enables or disables the block function.

The selections include:

NOT USED (default)

BLOCK USED

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the AO block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

SUNIT - Sample units - This parameter along with the value assigned to the STIME (sample time) input determines the amount of time between samples of the input value which are added to the History Data table.


HOURS (default)

MINUTES

SECONDS

STIME - Sample time - This input indicates the amount of time between samples of the input value which are added to the point history table. The units for this value are selected by the SUNIT (sample units) parameter. The range of values can be between 1.0 to 255.0. The Default = 1.0. If SECONDS is selected at SUNIT, The fractional part of the STIME is ignored. If HOURS are selected, the sample time


AO

is to the nearest minute only. Maximum sample interval is 255.0 hours.

Inputs

AI - Analog input value - The input value that is used to calculate the mA current signal at the output terminals. The relationship between the input value and the output current level is established by the values assigned to the INMN, INMX, OUTMN, and the OUTMX attributes below. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

INMN - Input value for the minimum output current value - The input value that produces the low value of mA current signal at the output terminals. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

INMX - Input value for the maximum output current value - The input value that produces the high value of mA current signal at the output terminals. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

OUTMN - Output minimum current value - The lowest current signal at the output terminals. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 20.0. (Default = 0.0 mA).

OUTMX - Output maximum current value - The highest current signal at the output terminals. This value must be greater than the value assigned as the OUTMN value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 20.0. (Default = 0.0 mA).

Outputs

OUT - Output in percent - The OUTMA value as a percentage between the OUTMN and OUTMX values. (Engineering unit = %).

OUTMA - Output in mA - Analog value of the current value at the output terminals (0 - 20 mA). (Engineering unit = mA). Note: This output can not be overriden directly. The output OUT can be overriden and the reflected equivalent current value will be expressed here and at the physical point.

Applying the block Interfacing with current

driven actuators The Analog Output blocks (AO:1 thru AO:4) provide a 0.0 to 20.0 mA current at the corresponding output terminals. Typical applications interface with 4 to 20 mA valve and damper actuators. The AI (analog input) provides the control signal to the AO block. The input to output scaling is established by the values assigned to the INMN, INMX, OUTMN, and OUTMX attributes. For inverted (reverse acting) output signals, the INMN value must be greater than the INMX value (Example INMN = 100.0, INMX = 0.0, OUTMN = 4.0, and OUTMX = 20.0).

In this example, the AI would receive its control signal from the output of a LOOP block or other blocks which are a part of a control strategy. The controlling signal range is from 0 to 100%. The output is scaled to provide 4 mA when the input is 0% and 20 mA when the input is 100%. Note: By assigning 100.0 to


AO

INMN and 0.0 to the INMX attributes, the output current is 20 mA when the input is 0% and 4 mA when the input is 100% (reverse acting).

The relationship of the input (AI) values to output (OUT) and (OUTMA) values is shown on this graph. Note: The OUT value is a percentage of the input range as established by the INMN and INMX attributes.

Interfacing with voltage

driven actuators The Analog Output blocks (AO:1 thru AO:4) provide up to 20.0 mA current at the corresponding output terminals. This current can be converted to a voltage signal by running the current through a resistance. The TAC MICROZONE II controller can drive up to 550Ω. This produces 11VDC at the controlled device. Typically these controlled devices are valve and damper actuators. The AI (analog input) provides the control signal to the AO block. The input to output scaling is established by the values assigned to the INMN, INMX, OUTMN, and OUTMX attributes.

In this example, the interface is from the current output of the TAC MICROZONE II controller to an actuator which has a control range of 6 to 9 volts DC. By placing a 500 Ω resistor at the actuator input a voltage signal can be developed which positions the actuator.

The relationship of the input (AI) values to output (OUT) and (OUTMA) values is shown on this graph. Note: The OUT value


AO

is a percentage of the input range as established by the INMN and INMX attributes.

The AI would receive its control signal from the output of a LOOP block or other blocks that are part of a control strategy. The controlling signal range is from 0 to 100%. The output is scaled to provide 12.0 mA when the input is 0% and 18.0 mA when the input is 100%. The actuator is controlled by a 6 to 9 volt DC signal.

Note: Typically a span of 5.5V to 9.5V is used to assure

complete stroking of the actuator. For this condition, the output is scaled to provide 11.0 mA when the input is 0% and 19.0 mA when the input is 100%. The actuator will be controlled by a 5.5 to 9.5 volt DC signal.

Control Considerations When setting up a LOOP to interface with an analog output, it is important to use a large enough Throttling Range to obtain stable proportional control before Integral or Derivative is employed.

When using some commonly used 6 to 9 VDC input signal actuators, it is a common practice to set the INMN and INMX at the AO block such that a 0.0 to 100.0% input signal will provide a voltage of 5,5 to 9.5 VDC across the resistor added in parallel with the actuator. Such a scheme, which usually involves using 11 to 19 mA., is used to assure that various actuators, with different input tolerances, will always be able to stroke full open and closed. This scheme, however changes the TR relationship. The TR now provides a 4 VDC output change over the control range of 0.0 to 100.0%. Since the actuator strokes over three volts only, it is actually only using 3/4 of the Throttling Range. A TR of 3 is really 2.25, a TR of 6 is really 4.5, a TR of 10 is really 7.5, and so on.


DO

DO - Digital Output Block

The DO block provides the means of turning a physical digital output point OFF or ON. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains eight DO blocks. Each block is assigned to one of the eight digital hardware outputs.

DIDV

INPUTS OUTPUTS

DIGITAL OUTPUT BLOCK

DO: 1

Physical Point

PARAMETERS

ACTON NAME

NC x NO x C x

DO-Digital Output configuration


ACTON - Selects the output action based on the input conditions. See the output DV attribute for definitions.


NOT USED (default)

DIRECT ACTING

REVERSE ACTING

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the DO block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

Inputs

DI - The input value that is monitored to determine the value at the output; OFF or ON. This input can be a fixed value or a pointer to an output value of another block. (Default = OFF).

Outputs

DV - Digital value of the output.

Input values versus output values based on selected action.

DI value OFF ON OFF ON

ACTON DIRECT DIRECT REVERSE REVERSE

DV value OFF ON ON OFF

Note: If the DO block is configured to be Direct/Reverse Acting,

then the point history table will consist of the last ten


DO

changes of state actions (OFF to ON or ON to OFF) of the input value and the date and time they occurred.

Applying the block The Digital Output blocks (DO:1 thru DO:8) provide a single throw double pole dry contact action at the corresponding output terminals. Typical applications will interface with lighting controls, motor contactors or starters, and heating and cooling relays or solenoids.

Theory of operation The DI (digital input) provides the control signal to the DO block. The input to output control action is established by the action assigned to the ACTON attribute. When the block is reset due to a power interruption or a manual forced reset, the output is forced to the OFF condition (relay made common to normally closed contact). As the blocks are executed, the DO block sets its output to the state determined by the input value and the defined action of the block.

Example Here the DI receives its control signal from the output of a SEQ (sequence) block. The controlling signal range is OFF or ON. The output is ON (relay energized) when the input value is ON. The output is OFF (relay de-energized) when the input value is OFF.


EMS

EMS - EMS Input Block

The EMS (TAC Energy Management System) block provides data transfer from the ZONE2 block in the parent GCM (TAC NETWORK 8000 System). The ZONE2 block signals the TAC MICROZONE II that it is in control. At this time the EMS output will go ON and all the EMS output values will be those sent from the parent GCM. If under local control, (EMS = OFF, or loss of ASD communications) the output(s) of the block will be the local input values.

EMS-EMS Input configuration INPUTS OUTPUTS

EMS BLOCKEMS:1

EMS CONTROL

EMS

PARAMETERS

ACTON NAME

FALBK

DI1DV1

DI2DV2

DI3DV3

DI4DV4

DI5DV5

DI6DV6

DI7DV7

DI8DV8

AI1AV1

AI2AV2

AI3AV3

AI4AV4

AI5AV5

AI6AV6

AI7AV7

AI8AV8

EMS DV 1

EMS DV 2

EMS DV 3

EMS DV 4

EMS DV 5

EMS DV 6

EMS DV 7

EMS DV 8

EMS AV 1

EMS AV 2

EMS AV 3

EMS AV 4

EMS AV 5

EMS AV 6

EMS AV 7

EMS AV 8

DS1

DS2

DS3

DS4

DS5

DS6

DS7

DS8

AS1

AS2

AS3

AS4

AS5

AS6

AS7

AS8

Note: If a value sent from the GCM is invalid or not defined at

the GCM, then the local value is taken for that output. The status of each output is indicated by the outputs DS1 - DS8 and AS1 - AS8, all corresponding to their respective outputs. (i.e. AS1 = ON, shows that AV1 is under EMS control and the value is being received from


EMS

the parent GCM. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains one EMS block.


ACTON - Action - Enables or disables the block function.


NOT USED (Default)

BLOCK USED

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the EMS block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

FALBK - Fallback - The time that the EMS block maintains the GCM values from the ZONE2 block before switching back to the local values if communications fail. If this time expires before receiving updated values from the GCM, the local values are used until communications is restored. The time assigned must be greater than the UPDATE time assigned at the ZONE2 block in the parent GCM (It is suggested that the FALBK time be as large as possible at least greater than two times the UPDATE TIME). The range of values is 10.0 to 255.0 seconds. (Default is 240 SEC.)

Inputs

DI 1 - Digital input 1 - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the DV 1 output if the EMS CONTROL is OFF in the parent controller, or communication is lost for longer than the FALBK time. (Default = OFF.)


:

:


AI 1 - Analog input 1 - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the AV 1 output if the EMS CONTROL is OFF in the parent controller, or communication is lost for longer than the FALBK time. The range of values acceptable is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

AI 2 - Analog input 2 - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the AV 2 output if


EMS

the EMS CONTROL is OFF in the parent controller, or communication is lost for longer than the FALBK time. The range of values acceptable is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

:

:

AI 8 - Analog input 8. Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the AV 8 output if the EMS CONTROL is OFF in the parent controller, or communication is lost for longer than the FALBK time. The range of values acceptable is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

Outputs

EMS - EMS control value - ON indicates the TAC MICROZONE II is under EMS control from a parent controller. OFF indicates the TAC MICROZONE II is in a stand alone mode of operation. This may be intentional or it may mean that communication between the TAC MICROZONE II controller and the parent controller has been lost.

DV 1 - Value of digital output 1. If EMS control is OFF or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at the input DI 1. If EMS output is ON, this value is the value at the input EMS DV 1 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller).

DS 1 - Status of Digital output 1. If this value is OFF, the value of DV1 is under local control and is from input DI1. If this value is ON, the value of DV1 is under EMS control and is from the input EMS DV 1 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller).


DS 2 - Status of Digital output 2. If this value is OFF, the value of DV2 is under local control and is from input DI2. If this value is ON, the value of DV2 is under EMS control and is from the input EMS DV 2 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller).

:

:


DS 8 - Status of Digital output 8. If this value is OFF, the value of DV8 is under local control and is from input DI8. If this value is ON, the value of DV8 is under EMS control and is


EMS

from the input EMS DV 8 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller).

AV 1 - Value of analog output 1. If EMS control is OFF or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at the input AI 1. If EMS control is ON, this value is the value at the input EMS AV 1 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller). Only values within the range of -255.0 to 255.0 are active. Values received from the parent controller outside the acceptable range are limited within -255.0 or 255.0.

AS 1 - Status of analog output 1. If this value is OFF, the value of AV1 is under local control and is from input AI1. If this value is ON, the value of AV1 is under EMS control and is from the output of the ZONE2 block EMS AV 1 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller).

AV 2 - Value of analog output 2. If EMS control is OFF or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at input AI 2. If EMS control is ON, this value is the value at the input EMS AV 2 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller). Only values within the range of -255.0 to 255.0 are active. Values received from the parent controller outside the acceptable range are limited within -255.0 or 255.0.


:

:

AV 8 - Value of analog output 8. If EMS control is OFF or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at the input AI 8. If EMS control is ON, this value is the value at the input EMS AV 8 (from the appropriate ZONE2 block in the parent controller). Only values within the range of -255.0 to 255.0 are active. Values received from the parent controller outside the acceptable range are limited within -255.0 or 255.0.


Applying the block The EMS block works in conjunction with a ZONE2 block in a parent controller. See the description of the ZONE2 block in the TAC NETWORK 8000 GCM/LCM PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL F-23120. The ZONE2 block must be configured to the same address as set on the DIP switches on the TAC MICROZONE II controller. When communications is established between the two controllers, and the EMS CONTROL input at the ZONE2


EMS

block is ON, the values assigned at the inputs of the ZONE2 block are communicated to the EMS block in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. These values are updated at the frequency of the UPDATE TIME assigned at the ZONE2 block plus some communication time. If communication is interrupted, or the EMS CONTROL input at the ZONE2 block is OFF, the EMS block falls back to the values assigned to the inputs (local input values) of the EMS block. Note: If communication is interrupted, the output of the EMS block holds its last communicated values until the assigned FALBK time has expired and then falls back to the values assigned to the inputs of the EMS block. When communication is restored, the EMS block switches back to using the EMS values from the ZONE2 block. If the EMS CONTROL input at the ZONE2 block is changed to OFF, the EMS block falls back to the values assigned to the local input values of the EMS block as soon as the blocks communicate. If the EMS CONTROL input at the ZONE2 block is changed to ON, the EMS block switches back to using the EMS values from the ZONE2 block as soon as the blocks communicate.

Values sent from the parent GCM which are outside the -255.0 to 255.0 range of the numbering system within the TAC MICROZONE II controller are truncated to -255.0 or 255.0 accordingly.

Each input value can individually fall back to the value assigned to its input if the value is "invalid" when sent from the parent GCM. Values sent from the parent GCM which are considered invalid within the parent GCM cause that individual value at the EMS blocks output to fallback to the value assigned to the input.

Values are considered not valid when they are:

NOT ACTIVE OUTPUT

ABNORMAL PARAMETER

ABNORMAL NO INPUT

ABNORMAL INPUT

ABNORMAL CHECKSUM ERR

NOT CALCULATED

ABNORMAL LOST COMM

The fallback will be immediate and the block will resume using the remote values immediately after the error is corrected.

The following figure illustrates a ZONE2 block which has been setup as follows:

• The EMS CONTROL input is set to be ON at all times. Anytime the TAC MICROZONE II and the parent controller are on-line with one another, the TAC MICROZONE II EMS block is receiving data from the parent controller. If communications is interrupted, the EMS block falls back to the values assigned as the local input values of the EMS block.

• EMS DV1 is pointed at a digital input in the parent controller which is used as a master enable for an area of air handlers within the building complex.


EMS

• EMS DV2 is pointed to the optimum start/stop block which is used for the scheduled starting and stopping of the air handlers.

• EMS AV1 is pointed to an APT (Analog Point Value) block which is used as a master setpoint adjustor for a group of air handlers controlling a common area.

• EMS AV2 is pointed at an outdoor air sensor value which is being shared by all air handlers.

The EMS block in the TAC MICROZONE II controller is set up to interface with this information. Fallback values that provide suitable operation of the TAC MICROZONE II controller in a stand alone mode of operation are set up at the EMS block. This could only disable the air handler control while communication is interrupted as shown in this figure:


EMS

INPUTS OUTPUTSEMS BLOCK

EMS:1

EMS CONTROL

EMS

PARAMETERS

ACTON NAME

FALBK

DI1DV1

DI2DV2

DI3DV3

DI4DV4

DI8DV8

AI1AV1

AI2AV2

AI3AV3

AI7AV7

AI8AV8

EMS DV 1

EMS DV 2

EMS DV 3

EMS DV 4

EMS DV 7

EMS DV 8

EMS AV 1

EMS AV 2

EMS AV 3

EMS AV 7

EMS AV 8

BLOCK USED AHU 3

10 SEC

ON

SCHED:2:OUT1

ON

ON

70.0

EMS:1:AV2

70.0

57.4

OFF

DS1

DS2

DS3

DS4

DS8

AS1

AS2

AS3

AS7

AS8

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

• DI1 is assigned a fixed value of ON. If communication is lost

for more than the 10 seconds assigned as the fallback time, the air handler is enabled for stand alone operation.

• DI2 is pointed to the schedule block which is used for the scheduled starting and stopping of the air handler. This schedule is not tied in with the other air handlers within the complex as the schedule in the parent controller was, but the system is on-line performing suitable control of the space.

• AI1 is assigned a fixed setpoint value of 70.0° F. A fallback setpoint should be chosen which is typical for the space being controlled.

• AV2 is used to provide information on the outdoor air temperature. So that a temperature value closer to the actual seasonal temperature can be maintained during short communication interruptions, a pointer can be assigned at AI2 which monitors its own output (EMS:1:AV2). If communication is lost and the EMS block switches to the fallback mode, the AV2 output remains at the last communicated outdoor air temperature value until communication is restored.

Values other than input and output values (UI, AO, and DO) which need to be communicated to a parent controller need to be assigned to a WINDOW block.


EMS

Communication Interface of data between TAC MICROZONE II and parent controller


HOLI

HOLI - Holiday Schedule Block

The HOLI block provides a method of interfacing holiday scheduling with regular time clock scheduling. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains two HOLI blocks.

HOLI-Holiday Schedule configuration

OUT1

OUT2

OUT 3

OUT 4

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE BLOCK

HOLI: 1

: :

ACTON NAME

1ONDA 1ONTM 1OFDA 1OFTM 1AOUT 2ONDA 2ONTM 2OFDA 2OFTM 2AOUT

8ONDA 8ONTM 8OFDA 8OFTM 8AOUT

DOUT1 DOUT2 DOUT3 DOUT4


ACTON - Action- Enables or disables the block function.

Selection includes:

NOT USED (default)

BLOCK USED

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the HOLI block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

1ONDA - START DATE 1 - The month and day of the year the holiday is to begin. The range is from January 1 through December 31. (Default = 01/01.)

1ONTM - START TIME 1 - The hour and minute for the start time the holiday is to begin. The format is dependent on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00AM through 11:59PM. (Default = 12:00AM.)


HOLI

1OFDA - STOP DATE 1 - The month and day of the year the holiday is to end. The range is from January 1 through December 31. (Default = 01/01.)

1OFTM - STOP TIME 1 - The hour and minute of the stop time the holiday is to end. The format is dependant on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00AM through 11:59PM. (Default = 12:00AM.)

1AOUT - OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT 1 - Selects the output number that holiday schedule 1 controls.


NOT USED (default)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4


2ONTM - START TIME 2 - The hour and minute of the start time the holiday is to begin. The format is dependent on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00AM through 11:59PM. (Default = 12:00AM.)


2OFTM - STOP TIME 2 - The hour and minute of the stop time the holiday is to end. The format is dependent on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00AM through 11:59PM. (Default = 12:00AM.)



NOT USED (default)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

Parameters repeated for holiday schedules 3 through 7.


8ONTM - START TIME 8 - The hour and minute of the start time the holiday is to begin. The format is dependent on the time


HOLI

type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00AM through 11:59PM. (Default = 12:00AM.)


8OFTM - STOP TIME 8 - The hour and minute of the stop time the holiday is to end. The format is dependent on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00AM through 11:59PM. (Default = 12:00AM.)



NOT USED (default)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

Inputs

DOUT1 - Default Output 1 - The default value for output 1 if the time value within the device is determined as being not valid. (Default = OFF.)




Outputs

OUT1 - OUTPUT 1 - This output is ON, when any holiday schedule assigned to this output is active, otherwise it is OFF.





HOLI

Applying the block

Block Operation If the START DATE (nONDA) is before the STOP DATE (nOFDA) of a particular schedule, then this schedule is considered to be active and it is checked against the current date and time to determine if it should be ON.

If the START DATE (nONDA) and/or the STOP DATE (nOFDA) for a particular schedule is 00/00, the schedule is considered to be inactive.

If the START DATE (nONDA) and START TIME (nONTM) for a particular schedule is the same or after the STOP DATE (nOFDA) and START TIME (nONTM), then this schedule is considered to be active and it is ON between the start date and time and the stop date and time. For example:

1ONDA (START DATE 1) 12/22

1ONTM (START TIME 1) 12:00AM

1OFDA (STOP DATE 1) 1/2

1OFTM (STOP TIME 1) 12:00AM

1AOUT (OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT 1) OUTPUT 1

This schedule would cause output 1 to turn ON at 12:00 am December 22, and OFF at 12:00 am on January 2, the following year.

There is no provision for entering which year you wish the holiday to occur. Therefore if the holiday block is not modified, the same holidays occur at the same dates and times every year.

Holiday schedules may start and stop on the same day. For example:


1ONTM (START TIME 1) 9:00AM




This schedule would cause output 2 to turn ON at 9:00 am April 30, and OFF at 10:00 am the same day. Note: For a schedule to be active when the start date and the stop date are the same, the start time must be earlier than the stop time.

If the START DATE & STOP DATE are equal (the same day) and the START TIME is after the STOP TIME the schedule will be ON for the whole year, except for the time between the STOP and START TIME. For example:


HOLI


1ONTM (START TIME 1) 5:00PM




This schedule would cause output 3 to turn ON at 5:00 pm April 30, and not turn OFF until April 30, at 9:00 am one year later.

The daily schedules which will be executed during the holiday period are setup in the SCHED block which must be used in conjunction with the proper holiday output.

Theory of block operation

A schedule is considered to be ON if:

• The current date is the same as the START DATE (nONDA) of a schedule and the current time is the same as or later, then the START TIME (nONTM) of the schedule.

• or if the current date is after the START DATE (nONDA) and before the STOP DATE (nOFDA) of the holiday schedule, then the schedule is considered to be ON.

• or if the current date is the same as the STOP DATE (nOFDA) and the current time is the same as or earlier than the STOP TIME (nOFTM), then the schedule is considered to be ON.

Once a holiday schedule is calculated to be ON, then the value of the corresponding OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT (nAOUT) parameter is checked to determine which output is to be turned ON. If multiple schedules are assigned to the same output, then, if any one or more schedules are calculated to be ON, that output is turned ON. This allows overlapping holiday schedules and multiple holidays enabling or disabling one or more blocks, without resorting to utility blocks to combine the outputs of various holiday blocks into one.


HOLI


LOOP General

LOOP - General

The LOOP block provides Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID) control with eight basic configurations. Some attributes apply only to certain configurations of the block and are specified as such. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four LOOP blocks.

The basic loop configurations include:

Single setpoint / single loop output (ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT)

Dual setpoint / single loop output (TWO SP, COMBINED OUT)

Single setpoint / dual loop output (ONE SP, TWO OUTPUT)

Dual setpoint / dual loop output (TWO SP, TWO OUTPUT)

Offset setpoint / dual loop output (OFFSET SP, TWO OUT)






Each configuration is described in detail as if it were a separate loop block.


LOOP One SP, Dir/Rev Out

LOOP - One setpoint, Dir/Rev output

This configuration consists of a single PID loop which loop provides a single output. The output can be configured as either direct acting or reverse acting.

LOOP - One Setpoint Dir/Rev Output

configuration

LOOP - One Setpoint Dir/Rev Output

Operation

Direct acting operation. The input attribute DENAB (Direct action enable) is ON.

Reverse acting operation. The input attribute DENAB (Direct action enable) is OFF.




CONFG - Loop Configuration - The selection assigned:

ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT (Single setpoint / single loop output)

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the LOOP block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

UNITS - Block Units - The Units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) , ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

ENABL - Loop Enable - If this input is OFF, the loop output goes to and remains at 0 %. This input has priority over all other inputs. (Default = OFF.)

ATMIN - Loop at Minimum - If in the occupied mode and this input is ON, the loop output goes to the MINOU value (minimum position). (Default = OFF.)

OCCUP - Occupied - If this input is ON, the controller is in the occupied mode and normal PID control is active. If OFF, two position control is active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) or the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint). (Default = OFF.)

UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - If the loop is direct acting ( DENAB = ON) and not in the occupied mode, the direct (cooling) output AV goes full ON (100 %) if the input is above the high limit. The output goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). If the loop is reverse acting this attribute has no effect. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - If the loop is reverse acting ( DENAB = OFF) and not in the occupied mode, the reverse (heating) output AV goes full ON (100 %) if the input is below the low limit. The output goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). If the loop is direct acting this attribute has no effect. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

UNHYS - Unoccupied Hysteresis - The hysteresis for the on/off control during the unoccupied mode. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

INPUT - Signal Input - The signal input to the loop block. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

SP - Setpoint - The main setpoint for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)



TR - Throttling Range - The main throttling range for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from 0.1 to 255.0. (Default = 3.0.)

IGAIN - Integral Gain - The integral gain expressed in repeats per minute where 0 disables the function. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 2.0. (Default = 0.0.)

DERV - Derivative Gain - The derivative gain expressed in minutes where 0 disables the function. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 4.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN.)

DENAB - Direct Action Enable - If this input is ON the loop is DIRECT ACTING. If this input is OFF the loop is REVERSE ACTING. The default is OFF.

MAXOU - Maximum Output - The maximum output allowed for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from -0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0 %.) If the MAXOU value assigned is below the MINOU value, the output will equal the MAXOU value.

MINOU - Minimum Output - The minimum output allowed for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0 %.) If the MINOU value assigned is greater than the MAXOU value, the output equals the MAXOU value.

RMTIM - Ramp Time - The time in minutes to go from 0% to 100% output after the loop is activated into PID control, with a OFF to ON transition at ENABL (loop enable) or OCCUP (occupied), or a block or system reset. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 60.0 MIN. (Default = 0.0 MIN.)

Outputs

AV - Output - 0 to 100 % direct or reverse acting output as selected by input DENAB.

Applying the block The AV output (direct or reverse acting) is 50% when the INPUT is equal to the SP (setpoint) when the loop is setup for proportional type of control only.

This example illustrates the simple application of a mixed air control loop. The LOOP block is setup as direct acting (DENAB = ON). Minimum ventilation is set by the MINOU setting. When the ENABL input signal is OFF, the output (AV) is 0.0%. When the ENABL input signal is ON, the LOOP block provides an output based on the controlling attribute assignments.

Mixed Air control configuration



Mixed Air control

operation

Setpoint 55.0 DEG F

Throttling Range 10.0 DEG F

Direct Output If DENAB = ON

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

100 % OPEN

12.0% Min Pos.

50.0 60.0

Mixed Air Temperature

Mixed Air Actuator Position

Unoccupied Operation

If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

Unoccupied

Direct acting control

If the loop is direct acting, the direct action enable input (DENAB) = ON, and the occupied input (OCCUP) is OFF, the output (AV) goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is above the unoccupied high limit setpoint (UHISP). The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).



UHISP

OCCUP = OFF DENAB= ON

100 %

0 %

100 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

UNHYS

Typically for Cooling Type Applications

Unoccupied

Reverse acting control

If the loop is reverse acting, the direct action enable input (DENAB) = OFF, and the occupied input (OCCUP) is OFF, the output (AV) goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is below the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint). The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).

OCCUP = OFF DENAB = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

UNHYS

Typically for Heating Type Applications

ULOSP


LOOP Two SP, Combined Out

LOOP - Two SP, combined output

This configuration consists of a single PID loop with two setpoints and the heating and cooling control signals are combined to form one common output signal.

LOOP - Two Setpoint Combined Output

configuration

TWO SP, COMBINED OUT

AV

INPUTS OUTPUTS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1

ENABL OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV AUXSP AUXTR

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME UNITS

LOOP - Two Setpoint

Combined Output Operation

Occupied operation

Attributes The attributes of the LOOP block - Two Setpoint Combined Output configuration are:

Parameters


TWO SP, COMBINED OUT (Two setpoint / combined loop output).




UNITS - Block units - The Units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint), ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range), AUXSP (auxiliary setpoint), and AUXTR (auxiliary TR). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

ENABL - Loop Enable - If this input is OFF, the loop output goes to and remains at 50.0 %. This input has priority over all other inputs. (Default = OFF.)

OCCUP - Occupied - If this input is ON, the controller is in the occupied mode and normal PID control is active. If OFF, two position control is active with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint). (Default = OFF.)

UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the output AV goes to 100 % if the input is above the high setpoint. The output goes to 50.0 % after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the output AV goes to 0.0 % if the input is below the low setpoint. The output goes to 0.0 % after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

UNHYS - Unoccupied Hysteresis - The hysteresis for the unoccupied control (50.0 to 0.0% or 50.0 to 100.0%) during the unoccupied mode. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

INPUT - Signal Input - The input to the loop block. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)





AUXSP - Auxiliary Setpoint - The auxiliary setpoint for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0). If the AUXSP exceeds the SP, the SP value is used for control (setpoint crossover protection.)



AUXTR - AUXILARY TR - The auxiliary throttling range for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from 0.1 to 255.0. (Default = 3.0.)

Outputs

AV - Output - 0 to 100 % combined direct and reverse output.

Applying the block The Two setpoint with a combined output configuration consists of a single PID loop with two setpoints (one for heating and one for cooling). The heating and cooling control signals are combined to form one common output signal. This output signal can be separated into the heating and cooling control signals by analog output blocks. The analog output (AO) blocks can be scaled for operation over the heating or the cooling parts of the common control signal. The following example illustrates two AO blocks used to control valves for both hot water and chilled water.

Hot and Chilled Water control configuration



Hot and Chilled Water control operation

Unoccupied operation If the occupied input (OCCUP) is OFF, two position control is active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

When the occupied input (OCCUP) is OFF, the output (AV) goes to 100.0% if the input is above the unoccupied high setpoint (UHISP). The output goes to 50.0% after the input goes below the unoccupied high setpoint minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The output (AV) goes to 0.0% if the input is below the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint). The output goes to 50.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low setpoint plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).


LOOP One SP, Two Out

LOOP - One setpoint / Two output

This configuration consists of a single PID loop with two outputs.

LOOP - One Setpoint Two Output

configuration

LOOP - One Setpoint Two Output Operation

100 %

0 %

50 %

Reverse Acting Output

(theating)

Throttling Range

100 %

0 %

50 %

SETPOINT

Directing Acting Output

(tcooling)

REVAV Output

AV Output

Sensed Temperature



ONE SP, TWO OUTPUT (One setpoint / two loop outputs)


UNITS - Block Units - The Units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are



displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint), ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

ENABL - Loop Enable - If this input is OFF, all loop outputs go to and remain at 0.0%. This input has priority over all other inputs. (Default = OFF.)

OCCUP - Occupied- If this input is ON, the controller is in the occupied mode and normal PID control is active. If OFF, two position control is active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint). (Default = OFF.)

UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the direct output AV goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is above the UHISP (unocc. high) setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse output REVAV goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is below the ULOSP (unocc low) setpoint. The REVAV output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)



SP - Setpoint - The setpoint for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)




Outputs

AV - Output - 0 to 100.0% direct acting output.

REVAV - Rev. Output - 0 to 100.0% reverse acting output.


LOOP One SP, Two Out Applying the block

The single setpoint with the two outputs configuration consists of a single PID loop with a single setpoint for both the direct and reverse acting outputs. When the INPUT is equal to the SP (setpoint) both outputs equal 0.0%. When the INPUT value becomes greater than the SP (setpoint), the AV output increases from 0.0% to 100.0% within one half of the throttling range selected for the block, the REVAV output remains at 0.0%. When the INPUT value goes lower than the SP (setpoint), the REVAV output increases from 0.0% to 100.0% within one half of the throttling range selected for the block. The AV output remains at 0.0%. The following example illustrates how this block can be used to control staged heating and staged cooling outputs. Here this is accomplished by using sequence and digital output blocks.

Staged heating and cooling control

configuration



Staged heating and cooling control

operation

100 %

0 %

50 %

SEQ:2 Output

Throttling Range

100 %

0 %

50 %

SETPOINT

SEQ:1 Output

REVAV signal into

SEQ;2 block

AV signal Into

SEQ:1 block

Sensed Temperature

Stg 1 ON

Stg 2 ON

Stg 1 OFF

Stg 2 OFF

Stg 1 ON

Stg 2 ON

Stg 3 ON

Stg 4 ON

Stg 1 OFF

Stg 2 OFF

Stg 3 OFF

Stg 4 OFF

Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

UHISP

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

100 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

UNHYS


UHISP

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

100 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

UNHYS


When the the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the output (AV) goes to 100.0% if the input is above the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint). The output AV goes to 0.0% after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS


ULOSP

When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output (REVAV) goes to 100.0%, if the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).


LOOP Two SP, Two Output

LOOP - Two setpoint, Two output

This configuration consists of a single PID loop with two setpoints and two outputs.

LOOP - Two Setpoints Two Output

configuration

TWO SP, TWO OUTPUT

AV

REVAV

INPUTS OUTPUTSLOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1

ENABL OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV AUXSP AUXTR

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME UNITS

LOOP - Dual Setpoint Dual Output block

LOOP - Two Setpoints Two Output Operation Direct Acting

Output (typically cooling)

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

REVAV Output

AV Output


(typically heating)

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

AUX Throttling

Range

SPAUX SP

Throttling Range



TWO SP, TWO OUTPUT (Two setpoints / Two loop outputs)




UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are be displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint), ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range), AUXSP (auxiliary setpoint), and AUXTR (auxiliary TR). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

ENABL - Loop Enable - If this input is OFF, all loop outputs go to and remain at 0 %. This input has priority over all other inputs. (Default = OFF.)


UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the direct output AV goes full ON (100 %) if the input is above the UHISP (unocc. high) setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse output REVAV goes full ON (100 %) if the input is below the ULOSP (unocc. low) setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)







AUXSP - Auxiliary Setpoint - The auxiliary setpoint for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0.



(Default = 0.0.) If the AUX SP exceeds the SP, the SP value is used for control (setpoint crossover protection.)

AUXTR - AUXILARY TR - The auxiliary throttling range for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from -0.1 to 255.0. (Default = 3.0.)

Outputs

AV - Output - 0 to 100.0% direct acting output.

REVAV - Rev. Output - 0 to 100.0% reverse acting output.

Applying the block This LOOP configuration appears to operate like two separate PID loops with the sensor input feeding both loops. The SP (setpoint) input provides the controlling setpoint for the AV (directing acting) output. The AUXSP (auxiliary setpoint) provides the controlling setpoint for the REVAV (reverse acting) output with a deadband between the setpoints. To provide setpoint crossover protection, the SP setpoint value is the master value. If the AUX SP value exceeds the SP value, the SP value is used for AUXSP setpoint value and the controlling setpoint for the REVAV (reverse acting) output.

In this example, the two setpoint two output configuration of the LOOP block is used to control an air handler with two stages of DX cooling and a proportional hot water valve for heating. The zone sensor is housed in a TS-90250-850 wall mounted room sensor. The TS-90250-850 room sensor also includes one setpoint adjuster. This setpoint adjuster will be used for the cooling setpoint. A second TS-90250-850 room sensor will be incorporated as the heating setpoint. The basic control block diagram is shown below.

The explanation of how this control configuration works is described below.

Sensor/Setpoint interface with the

controller

The TS-90250-850 room sensor consists of a 10K thermistor sensor with a 11K shunt and a setpoint potentiometer/resistor network with a scale of 55°F to 85°F (10°C to 30°C.). This room sensor works well with the TAC MICROZONE controller and it also provides an ASD bus interface for the PSI (Personal System Interface).



For the details on how to interface the TS-90250-850 setpoint potentiometer network into the TAC MICROZONE controller see the POTENTIOMETER INTERFACE section of the UI block.

The next illustration show the block configurations for the zone sensor and both the cooling and heating setpoints.



The next illustration shows the block configurations for the LOOP block and both the cooling and heating outputs.

The next illustration shows the cooling control sequence.

Throttling Range

100 %

0 %

50 %

SETPOINT

SEQ:1 Output

AV Signal

Into SEQ:1 block

Sensed Temperature

Stg 1 ON

Stg 2 ON

Stg 1 OFF

Stg 2 OFF

SP

Throttling Range

100 %

0 %

50 %

Direct Acting Output

(cooling)

AV Output

Sensed Temperature

AV Output



The next illustration shows the heating control sequence.

Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is

active using the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint) and ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint).

UHISP

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

100 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

UNHYS


UHISP

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

100 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

UNHYS


When the the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the output (AV) goes to 100.0% if the input is above the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint). The output AV goes to 0.0% after the input goes below the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).



OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS


ULOSP

When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output (REVAV) goes to 100.0%, if the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).


LOOP Offset SP, Two Out

LOOP - Offset setpoint, Two Output

This configuration consists of a single PID loop with an auxiliary setpoint that specifies the deadband between the direct and reverse outputs.

LOOP - Offset Setpoint Two Output

configuration

LOOP - Offset Setpoint Two Output Operation



OFFSET SP, TWO OUT (Offset setpoint / Two loop output)

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the LOOP block. This name can contain



up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint), ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range), OFFSP (offset setpoint), and AUXTR (auxiliary TR). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs



UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the direct output AV goes full ON (100 %) if the input is above the UHISP (unocc. high) setpoint. The output AV goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse output REVAV goes full ON (100 %) if the input is below the low setpoint. The output REVAV goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)









AUXTR - Auxiliary throttling range - The auxiliary throttling range for the loop. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 3.0.)

OFFSP - Offset setpoint - The tracking offset setpoint for the loop. The reverse acting setpoint is the SP value minus the OFFSP value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

Outputs

AV - Output - 0 to 100 % direct acting output.

REVAV - Rev. Output - 0 to 100 % reverse acting output.

Applying the block This loop control configuration with the two outputs consists of a single PID loop with a single setpoint SP for the direct acting output AV and an offset setpoint OFFSP that specifies the deadband between the direct acting output AV and the reverse acting output REVAV. When the INPUT is equal to the SP (setpoint) both outputs equal 0.0%. When the INPUT value becomes greater than the SP (setpoint), the AV output increases from 0.0% to 100.0% within the TR (throttling range) selected for the block. The REVAV output remains at 0.0%. When the INPUT value goes lower than the SP (setpoint) minus the OFFSP (offset setpoint), the REVAV output increases from 0.0% to 100.0% within the AUXTR (auxiliary throttling range) selected for the block. The AV output remains at 0.0%. The following example illustrates how this block can be used to control heating and cooling valves.

Heating and cooling control configuration



Heating and cooling control operation

Direct Acting Output

(tcooling)

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED


(theating)

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

AUX Throttling

Range

SP = (72.0 DEG F)

OFFSET SP

(3.0)Throttling

Range

AV

REVAV

Heating Setpoint = (69.0 DEG F)

Sensed Temperature

Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is active using the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint) and ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint).

UHISP = 85 DEG F

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

100 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output (AV)

Unoccupancy Cooling Operation

UNHYS = 2 DEG F

83 DEG F

When the the occupied input OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the output (AV) goes to 100.0% if the input is above the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint). The output AV goes to 0.0% after the input goes below the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS = 2 DEG F

ULOSP = 65 DEG F67 DEG F

Unoccupied Heating Operation



When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The reverse output (REVAV) goes to 100.0%. The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 1

This configuration consist of a single PID loop set up to perform the ASHRAE cycle 1 control sequence. The control sequence provides for a mixed air and a heating control cycle. The ASHRAE cycle 1 control sequence performs as follows:

Shutdown: Fan turned off, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements off.

Warm-up: Unit fan run, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements on.

Heating: Outdoor air damper proportionally opens to fixed position, heater elements de-energized in sequence with rise in room temperature.

Ventilating: Outdoor air damper open to fixed position, all heater elements off.

Note: Fan control, discharge low limit control, other system interface and interlock requirements are not a part of the loop block. These functions can be provided outside of the loop block and interfaced with the loop block and its control sequence.

Additional features provided with the ASHRAE cycle 1 configuration of this PID loop block:

• Occupied and unoccupied control cycles.

• Economizer override input.

• Complete proportional, integral, and derivative control functions.

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 1 configuration

ASHRAE CYCLE !

REVAV

ECAV

INPUTS OUTPUTS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1

ENABL OCCUP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME UNITS


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 1 Operation



ASHRAE CYCLE 1


UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units will be displayed with the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs


OCCUP - Occupied - If this input is ON, the controller is in the occupied mode and normal PID control is active. If OFF, two position control is active with the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) as the controlling setpoint. (Default = OFF.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse (REVAV) output goes full ON (100 %) if the input is below the low setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1







ECENA - Economizer Enable - If this input is OFF, the economizer output will go to and remain at 0.0% as long as this input is OFF. (Default = OFF.)

Outputs

REVAV - Rev. Output - 0.0 to 100.0% reverse acting output.

ECAV - Economizer Output - 0.0 to 100.0% economizer output. In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV is always at 0.0%.

Applying the block ASHRAE Cycle 1

configuration The ASHRAE Cycle 1 control sequence can be applied to a room unit ventilator. Typical room unit ventilators consist of a fan which blows air from either the outside or the space across a heat exchanger (coil) to the space. The temperature is controlled by positioning the outdoor/return air dampers and a hot water valve.

Fan

Filter

Coil

Outdoor air

Discharge Air

Return Air

Heating Valve

Outdoor Air Damper Actuator

The control sequence for this room unit ventilator is as follows:

When the unit is shutdown: Fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed and the return air damper is open. The hot water valve is closed.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The unit's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The hot water valve is full open.

As the temperature within the space increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the full outdoor air position. As the temperature increases, the hot water valve proportionally closes in sequence with the rise in the room temperature.

As the temperature within the space increases to the point where only ventilating is required, the outdoor air damper is opened to the full outdoor air position. The hot water valve is closed.

The control configuration to perform this sequence is shown in the following diagram.

70.0 4.0 ON

Fan Output

LOOP:1

REV AV ECAV

AO:1

Heating Output

AO:1

Economizer Output

UI:1

Sensor Input

ENABL OCCUP INPUT SP TR ECENA

ASHRAE CYCLE !

DO:1

Physical Output Points

Fan Enable SignalPhysical

Input Points

ON

Note: If the heating valve is a NO valve, the AO block must be programmed to be reverse acting. Example: INMN=100.0, INMX=0.0, OUTMN=4mA, and OUTMX=20mA.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1

ASHRAE Cycle 1 with staged heating

configuration

The ASHRAE Cycle 1 control sequence can be applied to a room unit ventilators with staged electric heat.

Fan

Filter

Outdoor air

Discharge Air

Return Air

Heating Element Relays


The control sequence for this room unit ventilator is as follows:

When the unit is shutdown: Fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed and the return air damper is open. The electric heat elements (electric resistance coils) are off.

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The units fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The electric heat elements are on.

As the temperature within the space increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the full outdoor air position. The electric heat elements proportionally turn off in sequence with the rise in the room temperature.

As the temperature within the space increases to the point where ventilating is required: The outdoor air damper is fully opened to the full outdoor air position. The electric heat elements are off.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1

The control configuration to perform this sequence is shown in the following diagram.

DO:1

DO:3

DO:2SEQ:1

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

AO:1

Economizer Output

UI:1

Sensor Input

DO:1


Fan Output


Input Points LOOP:1

REV AV ECAV

67.0 2.0

70.0

3.0 ON

ASHRAE CYCLE !

ON ENABL OCCUPULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR ECENA

Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is

active using the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS = 2 DEG F


Unoccupancy Low Limit Operation

When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint), the output (AV) goes to 100.0%. The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low limit setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis). In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV output is always at 0.0%.

Discharge low limit control

For applications requiring a low limit control sequence, a discharge air sensor is required.

Fan

Filter

Coil

Outdoor air

Discharge Air

Return Air

Heating Valve


Discharge Air Sensor


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 1

When the discharge air temperature drops below the discharge air setpoint (AISP) of the RESET:1 block, the economizer damper will proportionally close.

One control configuration to perform this sequence is shown in the following diagram.

UI:2

Discharge Sensor Input

LOOP:1

REV AV ECAV

UI:1

SpaceSensor Input

ENABL OCCUP INPUT SP TR

70.0 3.0

ASHRAE CYCLE !

DO:1


Fan Output

Fan Enable Signal

Physical Input

Points

ONAO:1

Heating Output

AO:1

Economizer Output

RESET:1

60.0 0.0

33.3 0.0

100.0

UTIL:16

SELECT HIGH LOW SELECT

OUT2

AI AISP RESSP RATIO OUTMN OUTMX

DIRECT ACTING

60

570 100

Discharge Temp

Control Output

RATIO= 100 3

=33.3


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2


This configuration consist of a single PID loop set up to perform the ASHRAE cycle 2 control sequence. The control sequence provides for a synchronized mixed air and a heating control cycle. The ASHRAE cycle 2 control sequence performs as follows:


Warm-up: Unit fan run, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements on.

Heating and Ventilating: Outdoor air damper opens to fixed position, heater elements de-energized in sequence with rise in room temperature.

Cooling and Ventilating: Outdoor air damper proportioned between minimum position and full open, all heater elements off.





• Minimum outdoor air adjustment.


LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 2 configuration

ASHRAE CYCLE 2

INPUTS OUTPUTS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1

ENABL ECFMN OCCUP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA ECMIN

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME UNITS

REVAV

ECAV


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2




ASHRAE CYCLE 2


UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs


ECFMN - Economizer Forced to Minimum - If this input is ON, the economizer output remains or goes to the minimum position setting as long as the input temperature is within or above the operating throttling range. (Default = OFF.)


ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - When the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse (heating) output goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is below the low setpoint. The output


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2

goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS ULOSP (unoccupied hysteresis) . The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)







ECENA - Economizer Enable - If this input is OFF, the economizer output goes to and remains at 0 % as long as this input is OFF. (Default = OFF.)

ECMIN - Economizer Minimum - The minimum output allowed for the economizer output. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0 %.)

Outputs

REVAV - Rev. Output - 0.0 to 100.0 % reverse acting output.

ECAV - Economizer Output - 0.0 to 100.0 % economizer output. In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV is always at 0.0%.


configuration The ASHRAE Cycle 2 control sequence can be applied to unit ventilators with face and bypass dampers. Typically these unit ventilators consist of a fan that blows air which is a mixture of outdoor air and returned space air back to the space. If this mixture is too cold the air is diverted by the face and bypass dampers and blown across a heat exchanger (coil) to the space. A minimum amount of outdoor air is admitted during the heating and ventilation cycle, except during the warm-up cycle when the outdoor air damper is closed. The temperature is controlled by positioning the outdoor air dampers and the face and bypass dampers.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2

The control sequence for this unit ventilator is as follows:

When the unit is shutdown: Fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed and the return air damper is open. The face and bypass dampers is closed to the face (coil).

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The unit's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The face and bypass dampers is opened to the full face (maximum heat).

As the temperature within the space increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the minimum outdoor air position. The face and bypass dampers proportionally closes to the face and opens to the bypass in sequence with the rise in the room temperature.

As the temperature within the space increases to the point where ventilating is required: The outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the full outdoor air position. The face and bypass dampers are closed to the face and fully opened to the bypass.

The control configuration to perform this sequence is shown in the following diagram. The minimum position setting is assigned at 15%.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2

OFF ON

70.0

3.0 ON 15

UI:1

LOOP:1

REV AV ECAV

AO:1

Face and Bypass Damper Output

AO:2

Economizer Output

Sensor Input

ASHRAE CYCLE 2

DO:1


Fan Output


Input Points

ENABL ECFMN OCCUP INPUT SP TR ECENA ECMIN

The ASHRAE Cycle 2 control sequence can be configured with a hot water valve or staged electric heat and can have a discharge low limit control sequence if required. See the ASHRAE Cycle 1 control sequence for details on these setups.

Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is active using the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS = 2 DEG F



When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint), the output (AV) goes to 100.0%. The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low limit setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis). In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV output is always at 0.0%.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 2 with cooling

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling configuration

This configuration consist of a single PID loop set up to perform the ASHRAE cycle 2 control sequence plus it provides an proportional output for controlling mechanical cooling equipment. The control sequence provides for a mixed air, a heating and cooling control cycle. The ASHRAE cycle 2 control sequence performs as follows:

Shutdown: Fan turned off, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements off, cooling equipment off.

Warm-up: Unit fan run, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements on, cooling equipment off.

Heating and Ventilating: Outdoor air damper opens to fixed position, heater elements de-energized in sequence with rise in room temperature.

Cooling and Ventilating: Outdoor air damper proportioned between minimum position and full open, cooling equipment is energized in sequence with rise in room temperature. All heater elements off.







• Outdoor air damper can be returned to minimum when cooling equipment is energized.



LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling Configuration

ECONOMIZER DISABLED

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1ENABL ECFMN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA ECMIN

ASHRAE CYCLE 2/COOL

CONFG NAME UNITS ECCL

AV

REVAV

ECAV

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 2 with Cooling

Operation



ASHRAE CYCLE 2/COOL

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the LOOP block. This name can contain



up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint), ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

ECCL - Economizer at Cooling - This parameter selects the cooling override of the economizer cycle. ECONOMIZER DISABLED will force the outdoor air damper (ECAV) to the minimum position setting whenever the mechanical cooling is enabled (AV= greater than 0.0%). ECONOMIZER ENABLED will allow the outdoor air damper (ECAV) be open within the mechanical cooling portion of the sequence. The ECFMN (Economizer Forced to Min) input will still be active and can be used to force the ECAV output the the ECMIN setting.


ECONOMIZER DISABLED (Default)

ECONOMIZER ENABLED

Inputs


ECFMN - Economizer Forced to Minimum - If the input is ON, the economizer output goes to the minimum position as long as the input temperature is within or above the operating throttling range. (Default = OFF.)


UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - If the loop is not in the occupied mode, the AV (direct acting [cooling]) output goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is above the high setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - If the loop is not in the occupied mode, the REVAV (reverse [heating]) output goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is below the low setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)









ECENA - Economizer Enable - If this input is OFF, the economizer output goes to and remains at 0.0% as long as this input is OFF. (Default = OFF.)

ECMIN - Economizer Output Minimum - The minimum output allowed for the economizer output. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0%.)

Outputs

AV - Output - 0.0 to 100.0 % direct acting output.


ECAV - Economizer Output - 0.0 to 100.0% economizer output or economizer limit for the ASHRAE cycles. In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV is always at 0.0%.

Applying the block ASHRAE Cycle 2 with

cooling configuration The ASHRAE Cycle 2/Cool control sequence can be applied to a single zone air handler. Typical single zone air handlers consist of a fan which blows air from either the outside or the space across a hot water coil and a chilled water coil to the space. A minimum amount of outdoor air is admitted during the heating cycle, except during the warm-up cycle when the outdoor air damper is closed. The temperature is controlled by positioning the outdoor air dampers and a hot water valve or a chilled water valve.



ASHRAE Cycle 2 with cooling configuration

The control sequence for this single zone air handler is as follows:

When the air handler is shutdown: The fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed. The hot water valve is closed. The chilled water valve is closed.

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The air handler's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The chilled water valve is closed. The hot water valve is open (maximum heat).

As the temperature within the space increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the minimum outdoor air position. The hot water valve proportionally closes in sequence with the rise in the room temperature.

As the temperature within the zone increases to the point where ventilating is required: The outdoor air damper proportions between minimum position and full outdoor air position. The chilled water valve proportionally opens with the rise in the room temperature.

ASHRAE Cycle II with Cooling

(ECCL=ECONOMIZER ENABLED)




OFF ON

70.0

4.5 ON 15

UI:1

LOOP:1

AV REVAV

ECAV

AO:2

Heating Output

AO:3

Economizer Output

Sensor Input

ASHRAE CYCLE 2

DO:1


Fan Output

Fan Enable Signal

Physical Input

Points

ENABL ECFMN OCCUP INPUT SP TR ECENA ECMIN

AO:1

Coolng Output


Economizer Disabled When the parameter ECCL (Economizer at Cooling) is disabled, the operation of the block is almost identical as the operation described above except that the economizer will force the outdoor air damper to the minimum position setting whenever the mechanical cooling is enabled (AV=>0.0%).

ECONOMIZER DISABLED

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1ENABL ECFMN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA ECMIN

ASHRAE CYCLE 2/COOL


AV

REVAV

ECAV


When the air handler is shutdown: The fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed. The heating is off. The cooling is off.

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The air handler's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The mechanical cooling is off. The mechanical heating is on (maximum heat).



As the temperature within the zone increases, the heating proportionally closes, after which the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to provide free cooling.

As the temperature within the zone increases to the point where ventilating is required: The outdoor air damper proportions between minimum position and full outdoor air position. If the temperature continues to increase, because the outdoor air can not adequately cool the zone, the cooling proportionally turns on and the outdoor air damper is positioned to the minimum outdoor air position.

As the zone temperature decreases, the cooling proportionally turns off. When the zone temperature reaches a point which is equal to the setpoint value plus 1/6 of the economizer's operating range, the economizer control is may operational.

ASHRAE Cycle II with Cooling

(ECCL=ECONOMIZER DISABLED)

Control Considerations When setting up a LOOP to interface with an analog output, it is important to use a large enough Throttling Range to obtain stable proportional control before Integral or Derivative is employed.

When using some commonly used 6 to 9 VDC input signal actuators, it is a common practice to set the INMN and INMX at the AO block such that a 0.0 to 100.0% input signal will provide a voltage of 5,5 to 9.5 VDC across the resistor added in parallel with the actuator. This scheme, usually involves using 11 to 19 mA., to assure full open and close off of various actuators. This scheme, however changes the TR relationship. The TR now



provides a 4 VDC output change over the control range of 0.0 to 100.0%. Since the actuator strokes over three volts only, it is actually only using 3/4 of the Throttling Range. A TR of 3 is really 2.25, a TR of 6 is really 4.5, a TR of 10 is really 7.5, and so on.

Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the ECAV (Economizer Output) is 0.0% and two position control of the heating (REVAV) and the cooling (AV) outputs are active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

When the the occupied input OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the output (AV) goes to 100.0% if the input is above the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint). The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).

OCCUP = OFF DRENA = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS


ULOSP

When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output (AV) goes to 100.0%, if the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low limit setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3


This ASHRAE cycle 3 configuration requires two PID loops. One loop is set up to perform the ASHRAE cycle 3 control sequence and the second loop performs the mixed air control sequence. The control sequence of the ASHRAE cycle 3 loop provides for a proportional heating control cycle and a mixed air control enable. The ASHRAE cycle 3 control sequence performs as follows:


Warm-up: Unit fan on, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements on.

Heating and Ventilating: Constant mixed air temperature maintained beyond minimum outdoor position by proportioning outdoor air damper, heater elements de-energized in sequence with rise in room temperature.

Cooling and Ventilating: Outdoor air damper proportioned by mixed air thermostat, all heater elements off.

Note: Fan control, discharge low limit control, other system interface and interlock requirements are not a part of the ASHRAE cycle 3 loop block. These functions can be provided outside of the loop block and interfaced with the loop block and its control sequence.






LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 3 Configuration


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3

The PID LOOP block configured for the ASHRAE cycle 3. To perform the complete ASHRAE 3 cycle requires two PID loops. One loop is set up to perform the ASHRAE cycle 3 control sequence and the second loop performs the mixed air control sequence.

The second PID LOOP block is configured for the One setpoint, Dir/Rev Output configuration.


Attributes Note: These attribute descriptions are for the Loop Configuration, ASHRAE CYCLE 3, only. See Loop Configuration ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT for the attribute descriptions of the second loop.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3

Parameters


ASHRAE CYCLE 3


UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs


ECFMN - Economizer Forced to Minimum - If the input is ON, the economizer output goes to the minimum position as long as the input temperature is within or above the operating throttling range. (Default = OFF.)


ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - If the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse (heating) output goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is below the low setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes above the UNOCC LOW SETPOINT plus the UNOCC HYSTERESIS. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)








LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3

ECENA - Economizer Enable - If this input is OFF, the economizer output will go to and remains at 0 % as long as this input is OFF. (Default = OFF.)

ECMIN - Economizer Minimum - The minimum output allowed for the economizer output. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0 %.)

Outputs


ECAV - Economizer Output 0.0 to 100.0 % economizer output. In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV is always at 0.0%.


configuration The ASHRAE Cycle 3 control sequence can be applied to unit ventilators with face and bypass dampers. Typically these unit ventilators consist of a fan which blows air which is a mixture of outdoor air and returned air back to the space. The mixed air temperature is controlled to a fixed setpoint (typically 55.0°F). If the mixed air temperature is too cold to warm the space, the air is diverted by the face and bypass dampers and pulled across a heat exchanger (coil) to the space. A minimum amount of outdoor air can be admitted during the heating and ventilation cycle, except during the warm-up cycle when the outdoor air damper is closed. The temperature is controlled by positioning the outdoor air dampers and the face and bypass dampers.

The control sequence for this unit ventilator is as follows:

When the unit is shutdown: Fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed and the return air damper is open. The face and bypass dampers are closed to the face (coil).

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The unit's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The face and bypass dampers open to the full face (maximum heat).

As the temperature within the space increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the minimum outdoor air position if desired. The face and bypass dampers proportionally closes to the face and opens to the bypass in parallel with the rise in the room temperature.

The temperature within the mixed air compartment is controlled to a fixed setpoint by the positioning the mixed air dampers.


LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3

As the temperature within the space increases to the point where ventilating is required: The outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the full outdoor air position if permitted by the mixed air control sequence. The face and bypass dampers are closed to the face and fully opened to the bypass.



LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3

OUT1OFF

ON OFF

65.0 DEGF 2.0 DEG F

70.0 DEG F 3.0 DEG F

0.0 0.0 MIN

ON 0.0%

OFF ON

0.0 DEG F 0,0 DEG F 0.0 DEG F

55.0 DEG F 10.0 DEG F

0.0 0.0 MIN

ON

15.0% 0.0 MIN

ASHRAE CYCLE 3

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1ENABL ECFMN OCCUP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA ECMIN

CONFG NAME UNITS

REVAV

ECAV

ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT

AV

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:2

CONFG NAME UNITS

ENABL ATMIN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV DENAB MAXOU MINOU RMTIM

UI:1

Zone Sensor Input

Physical Input

Points

UI:2

Mixed Air Sensor Input

AO:1

Face and Bypass Damper Output

AO:2

Economizer Output

DO:1


Fan Output

OCC/UNOCC Signal

UTIL:2IN1 IN2 SLECT

OUT1

UTIL:1IN1 IN2 SLECT

The ASHRAE Cycle 3 control sequence can be configured with a hot water valve or staged electric heat and can have a discharge low limit control sequence if required. See the ASHRAE Cycle 1 and 2 control sequences for details on these setups.

Unoccupied operation The control sequence shown above shows the implementation of the occupied/unoccupied feature. If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, two position control is active using the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

OCCUP = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS = 2 DEG F




LOOP ASHRAE Cycle 3

When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint). The output (AV) goes to 100.0%. The face and bypass dampers open to the full face (maximum heat). The fan is energized. The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low limit setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis). The face and bypass dampers close to the face. The fan is off. In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV output is always at 0.0%.



LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 3 with cooling

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 3 with Cooling configuration

This ASHRAE cycle 3 configuration requires two PID loops. One loop is set up to perform the ASHRAE cycle 3 control sequence and the second loop performs the mixed air control sequence. The control sequence of the ASHRAE cycle 3 loop provides for a heating control cycle and a mixed air control enable. The ASHRAE cycle 3 control sequence performs as follows:

Shutdown: Fan turned off, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements off, cooling equipment off.

Warm-up: Unit fan on, outdoor air damper closed, heater elements on, cooling equipment off.

Heating and Ventilating: Constant mixed air temperature is maintained beyond minimum outdoor position by proportioning outdoor air damper, heater elements de-energized in sequence with rise in room temperature.

Cooling and Ventilating: Outdoor air damper proportion between minimum position and full open, cooling equipment is energized in sequence with rise in room temperature. All heater elements off.







• Outdoor air damper returned to minimum when cooling equipment is energized.



LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle 3 with Cooling Configuration

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1

AV

REVAV

ECAV

ECONOMIZER DISABLED

ASHRAE CYCLE 3


ENABL ECFMN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA ECMIN

LOOP - ASHRAE Cycle

3 with Cooling Operation

Gray area controlled by the Mixed Air Control loop for a constant setpoint

Cooling and Ventilating

SP

Throttling Range

1/3 TR 1/3 TR

REVAV (REV.

ACTING) OUTPUT

Heating and Ventilating

Economizer operating range

1/3 Economizer operating range

HEATING OUTPUT

MIXED AIR OUTPUT

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

Warm-up

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

MINIMUM

COOLING OUTPUT

AV (DIR.

ACTING) OUTPUT

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

ECAV (ECONOMIZER)

OUTPUT

Input Temperature Increase

For ASHRAE cycle 3, LOOP 2 is used as an independent loop for the mixed air control. The economizer output now becomes the maximum damper position which limits the output in the mixed air loop.



ASHRAE CYCLE 3/COOL




UNITS - Block Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint), ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint), UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis), INPUT (signal input), SP (setpoint), and TR (throttling range). (Default = NONE.)

ECCL - Economizer at Cooling - This parameter selects the cooling override of the economizer cycle. ECONOMIZER DISABLED will force the outdoor air damper (ECAV) to the minimum position setting whenever the mechanical cooling is enabled (AV= greater than 0.0%). ECONOMIZER ENABLED will allow the outdoor air damper (ECAV) be open within the mechanical cooling portion of the sequence. The ECFMN (Economizer Forced to Min) input will still be active and can be used to force the ECAV output the the ECMIN setting. (AV= greater than 0.0%).


ECONOMIZER DISABLED (Default)

ECONOMIZER ENABLED

Inputs


ECFMN - Economizer Forced to Minimum - If the input is ON, the economizer output goes to the minimum position as long as the input temperature is within or above the operating throttling range.. (Default = OFF.)


UHISP - Unoccupied High Setpoint - If the loop is not in the occupied mode, the AV (direct acting [cooling]) output goes full ON (100.0%) if the input is above the high setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0.0%) after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis). The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

ULOSP - Unoccupied Low Setpoint - If the loop is not in the occupied mode, the reverse (heating) output goes full ON (100 %) if the input is below the low setpoint. The output goes to full OFF (0 %) after the input goes above the ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint) plus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)







IGAIN - Integral Gain - The integral gain expressed in repeats per minute where 0 disables the function. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 2.0. (Default = 0.0)


ECENA - Economizer Enable - If this input is OFF, the economizer output will go to and remains at 0 % as long as this input is OFF. (Default = OFF.)

ECMIN - Economizer Output Minimum - The minimum output allowed for the economizer output. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0%.)

Outputs

AV - Output - 0 to 100 % direct acting output.

REVAV - Rev. Output - 0 to 100 % reverse acting output.

ECAV - Economizer Output - 0.0 to 100.0% economizer output or economizer limit for the ASHRAE cycles. In the unoccupied mode, the ECAV is always at 0.0%.

Applying the block ASHRAE Cycle 3 with

cooling configuration The ASHRAE Cycle 3/Cool control sequence can be applied to a single zone air handler. Typical single zone air handlers consist of a fan which blows air from either the outside or the space across a hot water coil and a chilled water coil to the space. The mixed air temperature is controlled to a fixed setpoint (typically 55.0°F). A minimum amount of outdoor air is admitted during the heating cycle, except during the warm-up cycle when the outdoor air damper is closed. The The zone temperature is controlled by positioning the outdoor air dampers and a hot water valve and a chilled water valve.



OUTDOOR AIR

RELIEF AIR

MIXED AIR

RETURN AIR

DISCHARGE AIR

Hot water coil

chilled water coilFilter

Fan

Zone Sensor

CWVHWV

Mixed Air Damper Acturator

Mixed Air Sensor

ASHRAE Cycle 3 with

cooling configuration The ASHRAE Cycle 3/Cool control sequence can be applied to a single zone air handler. Typical single zone air handlers consist of a fan which draws air from either the outside or the space (return air) across a hot water coil and a chilled water coil and blows the air to the space. A minimum amount of outdoor air is admitted during the heating cycle, except during the warm-up cycle when the outdoor air damper is closed. Constant mixed air temperature is maintained beyond minimum outdoor position by proportioning outdoor air damper. The zone temperature is controlled by positioning the outdoor air dampers and a hot water valve or a chilled water valve.


When the air handler is shutdown: The fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed. The hot water valve is closed. The chilled water valve is closed.

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The unit's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The chilled water valve is closed. The hot water valve is open (maximum heat).

As the temperature within the space increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the minimum outdoor air position. The hot water valve proportionally closes in sequence with the rise in the room temperature.

As the temperature within the zone increases to the point where ventilating is required: The outdoor air damper proportions between minimum position and full outdoor air to maintain the mixed air setpoint when the ECCL = is enabled. The chilled water valve proportionally opens with a further rise in the room temperature.



Gray area controlled by the Mixed Air Control loop for a constant setpoint

Cooling and Ventilating

1/3 TR 1/3 TR

REVAV (REV.

ACTING) OUTPUT

Heating and Ventilating

Economizer operating range

1/3 Economizer operating range

HEATING OUTPUT

MIXED AIR OUTPUT

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

Warm-up

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

MINIMUM

COOLING OUTPUT

AV (DIR.

ACTING) OUTPUT

100 % OPEN

0 % CLOSED

Input Temperature Increase

SP = 70.0 DEG F

TR = 4.5 DEG F

72.25

67.75

70.75

69.25

ECAV (ECONOMIZER)

OUTPUT

The control configuration to perform this sequence is shown in the following diagram. The minimum position setting is assigned at 15% at MINOU in the mixed air control loop (LOOP:2).



OFF

ON OFF

65.0 DEGF 2.0 DEG F

70.0 DEG F 4.5 DEG F

0.0 0.0 MIN

ON 0.0%

OFF ON


55.0 DEG F 10.0 DEG F

0.0 0.0 MIN

ON

15.0% 0.0 MIN

ASHRAE CYCLE 3

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK


CONFG NAME UNITS

AV

REVAV

ECAV

ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT

AV

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:2

CONFG NAME UNITS

ENABL ATMIN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV DENAB MAXOU MINOU RMTIM

UI:1

Zone Sensor Input

Physical Input

Points

UI:2


AO:1

Heating Output

AO:2

Economizer Output


Fan Output

OCC/UNOCC Signal

UTIL:2IN1 IN2 SLECT

OUT1

UTIL:1IN1 IN2 SLECT

OUT1

AO:1

Cooling Output

DO:1


Economizer Disabled When the parameter ECCL (Economizer at Cooling) is disabled, the operation of the block is almost identical as the operation described above except that the economizer will force the outdoor air damper to the minimum position setting whenever the mechanical cooling is enabled (AV=>0.0%).



INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:1

AV

REVAV

ECAV

ECONOMIZER DISABLED

ASHRAE CYCLE 3/COOL


ENABL ECFMN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV ECENA ECMIN


When the air handler is shutdown: The fan is off. The outdoor air damper is closed. The heating is off. The cooling is off.

When the unit is turned on and the space is cold: The control sequence is in the warm-up portion of the control cycle. The unit's fan is on. The outdoor air damper is closed. The cooling is off. The heating is on (maximum heat).

As the temperature within the zone increases, the outdoor air damper proportionally opens to the minimum outdoor air position. With a further rise in room temperature, the heating valve modulates closed.

With a further rise in room temperature, the outdoor air damper proportions between minimum position and full outdoor air position to maintain the mixed air setpoint. If the temperature continues to increase, the outdoor air damper is closed to the minimum outdoor air position, the cooling valve proportionally opens because the outdoor air cannot cool the zone.

As the temperature decreases, the cooling proportionally turns off. When the temperature decreases to the point within 1/3 the operating range of the economizer cycle below where the cooling turned off, the economizer output will be enabled, proportioning between minimum position and full outdoor air position.



Unoccupied operation If the OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the ECAV (Economizer Output) is 0.0% and two position control of the heating (REVAV) and the cooling (AV) outputs is active using the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) and ULOSP (unocc. low setpoint).

When the the occupied input OCCUP (occupied input) is OFF, the output (AV) goes to 100.0% if the input is above the UHISP (unoccupied high setpoint). The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes below the UHISP (unocc. high setpoint) minus the UNHYS (unocc. hysteresis).

OCCUP = OFF DRENA = OFF

100 %

0 %

Sensed Temperature

LOOP output

(REVAV)

UNHYS


ULOSP

When the input is below the ULOSP (unoccupied low setpoint), the output (AV) goes to 100.0%. The output goes to 0.0% after the input goes above the unoccupied low limit setpoint plus the UNHYS (unoccupied hysteresis).


OSS

OSS - Optimum Start Stop Block

The OSS (Optimum Start Stop) block is a function which is typically applied to HVAC systems, such as air handlers, boilers, and other controlled devices which are placed in an unoccupied mode. The OSS program automatically starts equipment prior to occupancy at the latest possible moment to achieve desired occupancy conditions at the occupied time. In some applications, optimum stop may be applied to let the building "coast" at the end of the occupied hours. The LCM/TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four OSS blocks.

OSS - Optimum Start Stop configuration

DAMPR HENAB CENAB

ACTON NAME UNITS

MXSTA MXSTP COMFT

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

OPTIMUM START STOP BLOCK

OSS: 1ENABL TIMER INPUT SP HEATK COOLK COASK HTMOD


ACTON - Action - Selects whether or not the block is to be executed.

Selection includes:

NOT USED (default)

BLOCK USED

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the OSS block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

UNITS - Block units - The Units selected are from the engineering units list typically DEG F or DEG C. The units selected are displayed with the values for COMFT (Comfort zone), INPUT (Input temperature), and the SP (Setpoint). (Default = NONE.)

MXSTA - Maximum Prestart Time - The maximum number of minutes before occupied time, prestart is allowed to occur. The range is 0 to 254 (4 hours and 14 minutes max.). (Default = 0 MIN).


OSS

MXSTP - Maximum Prestop Time - The maximum number of minutes before unoccupied time, prestop is allowed to occur. The range is 0 to 254 (4 hours and 14 minutes max.). (Default = 0 MIN.)

COMFT - Comfort Zone - The number of degrees above or below setpoint the space temperature is allowed to be at the occupied time. This value is used to allow a certain amount of droop up or down depending on whether cooling or heating is enabled. The range is 0 to 255. (Default = 0.)

Inputs

ENABL - Enable - This input enables the blocks operation. ON = enabled, OFF = disabled. (The default is OFF.)

TIMER - Time Remaining - If the value at this input is negative, the block views this as the time in minutes left to occupied time. If the value at this input is positive, the block views this as the time in minutes left to unoccupied time. This input is typically pointed to the output (OUTn) of a SCHED (Schedule) block. The range of acceptable values is -255.0 to +255.0. (The default is 0.0 MIN.)

INPUT - Input Temperature - This temperature value controls the amount of prestart or prestop time calculated. The further this temperature is away from the setpoint, the more prestart time or the less prestop time calculated. Typically this input is pointed at the space temperature or the outdoor air temperature. The range of acceptable values is -255.0 to +255.0. (The default is 0.0.)

SP - Setpoint - This is the desired temperature of the space. This value is compared with the input temperature to determine the amount of prestart or prestop time. The range of acceptable values is -255.0 to +255.0. (The default is 0.0.)

HEATK - Heating K Factor - This value is the "K factor" or constant that is used when calculating prestart for heating. It may be thought of as a number that specifies how many minutes are required to raise the space temperature one degree. The range of acceptable values is 0.0 to 255.0. (The default is 0.0.)

COOLK - Cooling K Factor - This value is the "K factor" or constant that is used when calculating prestart for cooling. It may be thought of as a number that specifies how many minutes are required to lower the space temperature one degree. The range of acceptable values is 0.0 to 255.0. (The default is 0.0.)

COASK - Coasting K Factor - This value is the "K factor" or constant that is used when calculating prestop time. It may be thought of as a number that specifies how many minutes are required for the space temperature to drift up or down one degree. The range of acceptable values is 0.0 to 255.0. (The default is 0.0.)

HTMOD - Heat/Cool Mode - This input determines whether heating or cooling is enabled. If ON then the heating is


OSS

enabled. If OFF the cooling is enabled. (The default is OFF.)

Outputs

DAMPR - Damper Enable - This output is ON, when the block is enabled, during the occupied time interval. Otherwise it is OFF.

HENAB - Heat Enable - This output is ON, when the block is enabled, during the prestart interval when heating is enabled, and always during the occupied interval before prestop occurs. Otherwise it is OFF.

CENAB - Cool Enable - This output is ON, when the block is enabled, during the prestart interval when cooling is enabled, and always during the occupied interval before prestop occurs. Otherwise it is OFF.

Applying the block Block Operation There are four modes that this block can operate in:

• Heating Prestart

• Cooling Prestart

• Heating Prestop

• Cooling Prestop

The following chart indicates the setup required to activate the four modes of operation.

Heating Prestart Cooling Prestart Heating Prestop Cooling Prestop Heating Prestart/stop Cooling Prestart/stop

HTMOD ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

MXSTA >0.0 >0.0

-- --

>0.0 >0.0

MXSTP -- --

>0.0 >0.0 >0.0 >0.0

The OSS block for heating or cooling prestart will compare the time remaining before the schedule will turn on to the calculated heating or cooling prestart time in minutes. When the actual and the calculated times are equal the corresponding output is turned ON. Once the output is turned ON it remains ON until the scheduled off time or if prestop is setup, the calculated prestop time and the time remaining before the schedule will turn off are equal the corresponding output is turned OFF.

HEATING PRESTART The heating prestart mode is active if the HTMOD (Heat/Cool Mode) input is ON and the MXSTA (Maximum Prestart Time) attribute is a value greater than zero.

The formula used to calculate the amount of heating prestart time is as follows:

Number of minutes = HEATK * (( SP - COMFT ) - INPUT )

Where the number of minutes is limited between 0 and the MXSTA (Maximum prestart time) value.


OSS

If the INPUT (Input temperature) value is greater or equal to the SP (Setpoint) value - COMFT (Comfort zone) value, the Number of minutes of prestart is zero. As the INPUT (Input temperature) value goes down, the number of minutes calculated goes up. Also for a given temperature difference, the greater the HEATK value, the greater the amount of prestart time calculated.

COOLING PRESTART The cooling prestart mode is active if the HTMOD (Heat/Cool Mode) input is OFF and the MXSTA (Maximum Prestart Time) attribute is a value greater than zero.

The formula used to calculate the amount of cooling prestart time is as follows:

Number of minutes = COOLK * (INPUT - ( SP + COMFT ))

Where the number of minutes is limited between 0 and MXSTA (Maximum prestart time) value.

This is similar to the previous equation except that as the INPUT (Input temperature) goes up the number of minutes calculated goes up.

HEATING PRESTOP The heating prestop mode is active if the HTMOD (Heat/Cool Mode) input is ON and the MXSTP (Maximum Prestop Time) attribute is a value greater than zero.

The formula used to calculate the amount of heating prestop time is as follows:

Number of minutes = COASK * ( INPUT - (SP - COMFT ))

Where the number of minutes is limited between 0 and the MXSTP (Maximum prestop time) value.

In this case, it is assumed that the INPUT (Input temperature) value drifts downward when the heating is disabled.

COOLING PRESTOP The cooling prestop mode is active if the HTMOD (Heat/Cool Mode) input is OFF and the MXSTP (Maximum Prestop Time) attribute is a value greater than zero.

The formula used to calculate the amount of cooling prestop time is as follows:

Number of minutes = COASK * ((SP + COMFT ) - INPUT )

Where the number of minutes is limited between 0 and the MXSTP (Maximum prestop time) value.

In this case, it is assumed that the INPUT (Input temperature) value drifts upward when the cooling is disabled.


OSS

Basic configuration of OSS for a typical single zone air handler is shown below:

UI:1:OUT (zone temp.) UI:4:OUT (setpoint)

PROCESS ALARM

ON

65.0 DEGF 2.0 DEG F

4.5 DEG F 0.0

0.0 MIN ON

0.0%

OFF

ON OFF ON


DAMPR HENAB CENAB

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

HOLI:1OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

HOLI1 HOLI2 HOLI3 HOLI4

TIMER INPUT SP HTMOD

55.0 DEG F 10.0 DEG F

0.0 0.0 MIN

ON

15.0% 0.0 MIN

ASHRAE CYCLE 3//COOL

INPUTS

LOOP BLOCK


AV

REVAV

ECAV

ONE SP, DIR/REV OUT

AV

INPUTS OUTPUTS

LOOP BLOCK

LOOP:2ENABL ATMIN OCCUP UHISP ULOSP UNHYS INPUT SP TR IGAIN DERV DENAB MAXOU MINOU RMTIM

UI:1

Zone Air Sensor

Input

Physical Input

Points

UI:2


AO:1

Heating Output

AO:2

Economizer Output


AO:1

Cooling Output

OUT1 OUT2

DI1 DI2 DI3

DI1 OR DI2 OR DI3

UI:3

Outdoor Air Sensor

Input

UI:4

Remote Setpoint

Input

Air Handler Configuration ASHRAE Cycle 3 with Cooling (See LOOP section for details)

SCHED:1

UTIL:1

OSS:1

OUT1 OUT2

AI TRIGR RETRN

UTIL:2

OUT1AI A2 A3

UTIL:3

MATH (AI1 - AI2) -AI3

UI:4:OUT (setpoint) 2.0 0.0

Global OSS control applications

Global OSS control applications must be implemented within the GCM with fallback OSS programs within each ASD device. The OSS block within the LCM/TAC MICROZONE II controller can only be interfaced with the SCHED block within the LCM/TAC MICROZONE II controller.


OSS


RESET

RESET - Setpoint reset

The RESET block provides a proportional and optionally limited output for a setpoint adjustment based on a changing independent variable input. For example, the RESET block can be used to calculate a new boiler control setpoint based on a change in the outside air temperature. The range through which the setpoint can be changed can be controlled by the RESET block's output minimum and maximum settings. The LCM/TAC MICROZONE II controller contains two RESET blocks.

RESET- Setpoint Reset configuration

OUT

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

RESET BLOCK

RESET: 1

ACTON NAME IUNIT

OUNIT SCALE



ACTON - Action - Selects the type of reset action desired.

Selection includes:

NOT USED (default)

DIRECT ACTING Increasing value at AI produces an increasing value at OUT.

REVERSE ACTING Increasing value at AI produces a decreasing value at OUT.

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the RESET block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

IUNIT - Input Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units that will be displayed with the AI (analog input) and the AISP (analog input setpoint). (Default = NONE).

OUNIT - Output Units - The Units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the RESSP (reset setpoint), OUTMN (output minimum), OUTMX (output maximum), and the OUT (output). (Default = NONE).


RESET

SCALE - Ratio Scale - Selects the multiplier to be applied to the reset RATIO value.

Selections include:

1 (default)

10

10 (same as multipling the RATIO value by 0.1).

100 (same as multipling the RATIO value by 0.01).

Inputs

AI - Analog Input - The independent input value used to determine the setpoint. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

AISP - Input Setpoint - The input setpoint. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

RESSP - Reset Setpoint - The output setpoint value if the input is at the AISP (analog input setpoint) value. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

RATIO - Reset Ratio - The change in the input required to change the output setpoint value by 1. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

The reset ratio is:

Where the Reset Ratio is equal to the absolute value of the change in the output divided by a given change in the input times the SCALE value. The values for the ∆INPUT and the ∆OUTPUT must be in direct relationship to each other.

Note: Ratio values should be entered as whole numbers and the proper SCALE factor should be assigned. Example: a ratio of .5 should be assigned as RATIO = 5.0 and SCALE = 10, a ratio of 1.25 should be assigned as RATIO =125.0 and SCALE =

100, etc.

OUTMN - Output Minimum - The minimum value that the output setpoint value is allowed to reach. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

OUTMX - Output Maximum - The maximum value that the output setpoint value is allowed to reach. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.) Note: The span between the OUTMX and OUTMN values should not exceed 255.0.

Outputs

OUT - Output Setpoint - The reset setpoint value.


RESET

Applying the block RESET Block General The SETPOINT RESET FUNCTION provides the ability to

change a setpoint (the control point) of a control loop, 2-position thermostat, etc., based on the action of another variable. The reset variable can be assigned engineering units and an input to output relationship. This relationship establishes the reset schedule.

The OUTPUT SETPOINT value equals:

where the limits are established by the value assigned to the OUTMX (output maximum) and OUTMN (output minimum) inputs.

INPUT LOW VALUE

OUTPUT LOW VALUE

INPUT HIGH VALUE

OUTPUT HIGH VALUE

DIRECT RESET

INPUT SETPOINT

RESET SETPOINT

Slope = RATIO * SCALE

Direct Reset Action

The value assigned for the AISP (input setpoint) must be a value which is known to have a direct relationship to the RESSP (reset setpoint) value.

The RATIO value is determined by the formula:

where the ∆ OUTPUT value is in direct relationship to the ∆ INPUT value change.

Direct Reset Action Example

The outdoor air temperature resets the setpoint of a humidity controlling algorithm. As the OA temperature decreases from 70°F to -20°F, the setpoint is changed (reset) from 35% to 15%. The reset control action is direct-acting because as the OA temperature decreases, the humidity setpoint is decreased.

O U T D O O R

A I

R

CONTROL SETPOINT

70°F

-20°F

35%15%

OUTDOOR AIR RESETTING THE HUMIDITY CONTROL SETPOIN

AISP (Input Setpoint) RESSP (Reset Setpoint)

= 70°F = 35%

INPUT SETPOINT

RESET SETPOINT


RESET

The RATIO value is determined by:

² OUTPUT ² INPUT

RESET RATIO = 35 - 1570 - (-20)

2090

.222= = =

To allow the number .222 to be as benefical useful as possible, the ÷100 scale factor should be selected and the ratio value should be enter as 22.2.

ACTION = DIRECT ACTING

SCALE = ÷100

AISP = 70 DEG F

RESSP = 35 DEG F

RATIO = 22.2

INPUT LOW VALUE

INPUT HIGH VALUE

REVERSE RESET

INPUT SETPOINT

RESET SETPOINT

OUTPUT LOW VALUE

OUTPUT HIGH VALUE

Reverse Reset Action

Just like the direct acting reset function, the value assigned for the AISP (input setpoint) must be a value which is known to have a direct relationship to the RESSP (reset setpoint) value.

The RATIO value is determined by the formula:

where the ∆ OUTPUT value is in direct relationship to the ∆ INPUT value change.

Reverse Reset Action Example

With an air handler, where we want to reset the discharge air temperature based on the temperature of the return air temperature, we may develop the following relationship: when the return air temperature is 70°F, the discharge should be 70°F, and when the return air temperature raises to 75°F, the discharge should be 60°F.


RESET

The RATIO value is determined by:

60 - 7075 - 70

-105

= = =² OUTPUT ² INPUT

RESET RATIO =5

2=10

Absolute values

Reset Limits The controlling setpoint is limited by the OUTMN (Output minimum value) and OUTMX (Output maximum value) parameters. If the calculated setpoint value exceeds the limit value, the limit value is used as the controlling setpoint. The setpoint limit values are independent of the values used for the slope calculations.

Example interfaced with

a LOOP The outdoor air temperature resets the setpoint of a hot water control algorithm. As the outdoor air temperature decreases from 70°F to -20°F, the setpoint of the hot water control algorithm will be changed (reset) from 70°F to 200°F.

The reset control action is reverse acting because as the OA temperature decreases, the hot water setpoint is increased.

² OUTPUT ² INPUT

RESET RATIO = 70 - 20070 - (-20)

-13090

= = = 13090

1.44=

Absolute values


RESET

This illustration shows the setup for the outdoor air temperature resetting the setpoint of a hot water control algorithm described above.

Reset Function using Utility Blocks

RESET Block Function using UTIL Blocks

The same basic SETPOINT RESET FUNCTION can be performed by using Utility blocks configured as shown in the illustrations below.

The OUTPUT value equals:

where the limits are established by the value assigned to the OUTMX (output maximum) and OUTMN (output minimum) inputs of the third UTIL Block.


RESET

Direct Action Reset

The following illustration shows the setup using Utility blocks for performing direct action reset.


UTIL:1AI1

AI2

AI3

MATH (AI1 - AI2) AI3

UTIL:2

OUT1AI1

AI2

AI3

MATH (AI1 + AI2) +AI3

UTIL:3

OUT1AI1 OUTMX OUTMN

LIMIT UNITS

0.0

OUT

UNITS

(AI1 + AI2) +AI3 = Direct Acting

*

RESET Block Function

OUT1

Reverse Action Reset

The following illustration shows the setup using Utility blocks for performing reverse action reset.


UTIL:1

OUT1

AI1

AI2

AI3

MATH (AI1 - AI2) AI3

UTIL:2

OUT1AI1

AI2

AI3

MATH (AI1 - AI2) -AI3

UTIL:3

OUT1AI1 OUTMX OUTMN

LIMIT UNITS

0.0

OUT

UNITS

(AI1 - AI2) -AI3 = Reverse Acting.

*

RESET Block Function

Note: The mathematical operation for the second UTIL block is

(AI1-AI2)-AI3.


RESET


RGRP

RGRP - Receive Group Data Block

The SEND GROUP DATA block (SGRP) resides in the GCM-8XX21 controller and is designed to provide group communications between the TAC NETWORK 8000 building automation system and the TAC MICROFLO™ II and TAC MICROZONE® II controllers. It is used to transmit information that is commonly used by a group of controllers. Night setback setpoints, unoccupied setpoints, EDL load shedding, smoke detect/purge sequences, etc. are some common uses of the SGRP block. The SGRP block transmits its information to RGRP (RECEIVE GROUP DATA) blocks in the TAC MICROZONE II controllers

The RGRP data block provides data transfer with the SEND GROUP DATA block (SGRP) in the GCM. The GCM "SGRP" block is designed to provide group communications between the TAC NETWORK 8000 building automation system and the TAC MICROZONE II controllers. It is used to transmit information that is commonly used by a group of controllers. Night setback setpoints, unoccupied setpoints, EDL load shedding, smoke detect/purge sequences, etc. are some common uses of the SGRP block.

RGRP-Receive Group Data configuration

RECEIVE GROUP DATA BLOCK

RGRP:1RMOTE

INPUTS OUTPUTS

REMOTE CONTROL

PARAMETERS

ACTON NAME

FALBK

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

DI7

DI8

AI1

AI2ANALOG INPUT 1

DIGITAL INPUT 1

DIGITAL INPUT 2

DIGITAL INPUT 3

DIGITAL INPUT 4

DIGITAL INPUT 5

DIGITAL INPUT 6

DIGITAL INPUT 7

DIGITAL INPUT 8

ANALOG INPUT 2

DV1

DV2

DV3

DV4

DV5

DV6

DV7

DV8

AV1

AV2

DS1

DS2

DS3

DS4

DS5

DS6

DS7

DS8

AS1

AS2

If the RGRP block is under local control, the outputs of the block are the local input values. If under RMOTE control, the outputs


RGRP

of the block are the values sent from the GCM block. Note: If a value sent from the GCM is invalid or not defined at the GCM, then the local value is taken for that output. The status, RMOTE control = ON and local control = OFF, is indicated for each output. The TAC MICROZONE II controller will contain one RGRP block.


ACTON - ACTION -


NOT USED (Default)

BLOCK USED

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the RGRP block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

FALBK - FALLBACK - The time that the RGRP block maintains the GCM values from the SGRP block before switching back to the local values if communication fails. If this time expires before receiving updated values from the GCM, the local values are used until communications is restored. The time assigned must be greater than the UPDATE time assigned at the SGRP block in the parent GCM (It is suggested that the FALBK time be greater than two times the UPDATE TIME). The range of values is from 10 to 255 seconds (10 seconds to 4 minutes and 15 seconds). The default is 240 SEC.

Inputs

DI 1 - Digital input 1. - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the DV 1 output, if the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input is OFF in the parent controller or communications is lost. (Default = OFF).

DI 2 - Digital input 2. - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the DV 2 output, if the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input is OFF in the parent controller or communications is lost. (Default = OFF).

:

:

DI 8 - Digital input 8. - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the DV 8 output if the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input is OFF in the parent controller or communications is lost. (Default = OFF).

AI 1 - Analog input 1. - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the AV 1 output if the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input is OFF in the parent controller or communications is lost. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).


RGRP

AI 2 - Analog input 2. - Typically the value or pointer assigned to this input is used as a fallback value for the AV 2 output if the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input is OFF in the parent controller or communications is lost. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

Outputs

RMOTE - Remote Control State - ON indicates the output data of the block is from the SGRP block in the remote device. OFF indicates this block is in a stand alone mode of operation. This may be intentional or it may mean that communication between the TAC MICROZONE II controller and the parent controller has been lost.

DV 1 - Digital value of digital output 1. If RMOTE output is OFF, or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at the input DI 1. If RMOTE output is ON, this value is the value at the input DIGITAL INPUT 1 (DIN1) from the appropriate SGRP block of the parent controller.

DS 1 - Digital output Status 1. If this value is OFF, the value of DV1 is under local control and is from input DI1. If this value is ON, the value of DV1 is under remote control and is from the input DIGITAL INPUT 1 (DIN1) from the appropriate SGRP block in the parent controller.



:

:



AV 1 - Analog value of analog output 1. If RMOTE output is OFF, or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at the input AI 1. If RMOTE output is ON, this value is the value at the input ANALOG INPUT 1 (AIN1) from the appropriate SGRP block of the parent controller.


RGRP

AS 1 - Analog output Status 1. If this value is OFF, the value of AV1 is under local control and is from input AI1. If this value is ON, the value of AV1 is under remote control and is from the input ANALOG INPUT 1 (AIN1) from the appropriate SGRP block in the parent controller.

AV 2 - Analog value of analog output 2. If RMOTE output is OFF, or the value from the parent GCM is not valid, this value is the value at the input AI 2. If RMOTE output is ON, this value is the value at the input ANALOG INPUT 2 (AIN2) from the appropriate SGRP block of the parent controller.

AS 2 - Analog output Status 2. If this value is OFF, the value of AV2 is under local control and is from input AI2. If this value is ON, the value of AV2 is under remote control and is from the input ANALOG INPUT 2 (AIN2) from the appropriate SGRP block in the parent controller.

Applying the block General The RGRP block works in conjunction with the SGRP block in a

parent controller. See the description of the SGRP block in the TAC NETWORK 8000 GCM/LCM PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL F-23120. The SGRP block must be configured to the same Group Number as assigned to the RGRP block in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. When communication is established between the two controllers, and the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input at the SGRP block is ON, the values assigned at the inputs of the SGRP block are communicated to the RGRP block in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. These values are updated at the frequency of the UPDATE TIME assigned at the SGRP block plus some communication time. If communication is interrupted, or the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input at the SGRP block is OFF, the RGRP block falls back to the values assigned to the inputs of the RGRP block. Note: If communication is interrupted, the output of the RGRP block holds its last communicated values until the assigned FALBK time has expired and then falls back to the values assigned to the inputs of the RGRP block. When communication is restored, the RGRP block switches back to using the RGRP values from the SGRP block. If the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input at the SGRP block is changed to OFF, the RGRP block falls back to the values assigned to the inputs of the RGRP block as soon as the fallback time elapses. If the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) input at the SGRP block is changed to ON, the RGRP block switches back to using the RGRP values from the SGRP block as soon as the blocks communicate.

Values sent from the parent GCM which are outside the -255.0 to 255.0 range of the numbering system within the TAC MICROZONE II controller are truncated to -255.0 or 255.0 accordingly.

Values sent from the parent GCM which are considered not valid within the parent GCM cause that individual value at the RGRP blocks output to fall back to the value assigned to the input.


RGRP

Values are considered invalid when they are:

NOT ACTIVE OUTPUT

ABNORMAL PARAMETER

ABNORMAL NO INPUT

ABNORMAL INPUT

ABNORMAL CHECKSUM ERR

NOT CALCULATED

ABNORMAL LOST COMM

HIGH PRIORITY Operation

The SGRP block in the parent controller has an HIPRI (High Priority) input. This input should be used only when the input data must be sent to the group TAC MICROZONE II as soon as possible.

When the HIPRI (High Priority) input is ON and the BCENA (Broadcast Enable) is ON at the SGRP block and the SGRP executes at its assigned UPDATE TIME, the values assigned to the inputs are placed at the top of the list of information to be sent to the RGRP blocks with the same group number.

If the value at the HIGH PRIORITY input is left ON, each time that the SGRP block executes (at its assigned UPDATE TIME) the values assigned to the inputs are placed at the top of the list of information to be sent to the RGRP blocks with the same group number.

Periodic broadcast feature

One added feature of the SGRP block is that it was designed to conserve bus activity. One way that it accomplishes this is by only broadcasting data when the data changes. The SGRP block performs this function as follows:

When the UPDATE TIME has elapsed, the block checks if any of the digital values have changed since the last time that the block was executed. If one or more have changed, the block continues to execute and broadcast all of the values to the receiving TAC MICROZONE II controllers. If none of the digital values have changed, the block checks to see if the HIGH PRIORITY input is ON. If the HIGH PRIORITY input is ON, the block continues to execute in the high priority mode. If none of the digital values have changed and the HIGH PRIORITY input is OFF, the block does not complete its execution and the controller continues on with the next block. The SGRP block attempts to execute each time the UPDATE TIME has elapsed. If the SGRP block has not broadcast in fifteen (15) seconds, the block continues to execute and broadcast all of the values to the receiving TAC MICROZONE II controllers.

Note: Changing analog values does not cause a complete block execution. If none of the digital values change, the analog values are broadcast on every tenth UPDATE TIME period. Therefore, if the block UPDATE TIME is 1 SEC, the analog values are not broadcast more frequently then once every ten seconds. If the


RGRP

HIGH PRIORITY input is ON, the block executes in the high priority mode at each UPDATE TIME.

The important thing to remember is that SGRP/RGRP blocks are used when similar information needs to be communicated to a number of TAC MICROZONE II controllers at the same time.

This illustration shows a typical ASD bus architecture with some TAC MICROZONE II controllers, some TAC MICROFLO II controllers with a GCM-8XX21 parent controller. Here three groups have been set up. SGRP:ONE is setup to communicate with TAC MICROFLO IIs assigned as group 3. Five TAC MICROFLO IIs have been designated as being a part of group 3. SGRP:TWO is set up to communicate with TAC MICROZONE IIs assigned as group 3. Four TAC MICROZONE IIs have been designated as being a part of group 3. SGRP:THREE is set up to communicate with TAC MICROZONE IIs assigned as group 2. Four TAC MICROFLO IIs have been designated as being a part of group 2. When one of the SGRP blocks executes, the information will be "broadcast" to all of the controllers of the selected type with the same group assignment.


RGRP

Using SGRP/RGRP blocks with the TAC

MICROZONE II controllers

When a SGRP block is set up with a DEVICE TYPE of TAC MICROZONE II, the SGRP block has the following attributes:

PARAMETERS:

01 UPDATE TIME [UPTIM] 5 SEC

02 DEVICE TYPE [TYPE] MICROFLO II

03 GROUP NUMBER [GROUP] 0

INPUTS:

01 BROADCAST ENABLE [BCENA] ON

02 HIGH PRIORITY [HIPRI] OFF

03 DIGITAL INPUT 1 [DIN1] EMPTY








11 ANALOG INPUT 1 [AIN1] EMPTY

12 ANALOG INPUT 2 [AIN2] EMPTY

OUTPUTS:

01 BROADCAST STATUS [BCSTS]-DV

The SGRP block will control the input values of the RECEIVE GROUP DATA (RGRP) block within the TAC MICROZONE II controllers. The RGRP blocks that will receive the data are those within TAC MICROZONE IIs which are assigned the same GROUP NUMBER on the GCM ASD bus only. Up to eight digital and two analog values can be broadcast to a group of TAC MICROZONE II controllers. The operation of the SGRP block, with a DEVICE TYPE of TAC MICROZONE II, is similar to that of the TAC MICROFLO II with some exceptions.

When the BROADCAST ENABLE is ON at the SGRP block and the SGRP executes at its assigned UPDATE TIME, the values assigned to the inputs will be added to the bus communications process and through normal communication activity the values will be sent to the RGRP blocks with the same group number.

INPUTS OUTPUTS

RECEIVE GROUP DATA BLOCK

RGRP:1REMOTE CONTROL

REMOTE

GRP DIGITAL VALUE 1

DIGITAL INPUT 1DIGITAL VALUE 1

GRP DIGITAL VALUE 2


GRP DIGITAL VALUE 3


When communication is established with each TAC MICROZONE II, the values are placed at their proper SGRP attribute locations and the SGRP control is enabled in the RGRP


RGRP

block. When the SGRP control is enabled, the control algorithm will respond based on the values sent from the remote SGRP block in the parent GCM. These value will be updated each time the SGRP block executes in the parent GCM as long as the BROADCAST ENABLE input is ON.

When the BROADCAST ENABLE is OFF, the SGRP control in the RGRP block is disabled and the control algorithm will respond to the values assigned to the inputs of the RGRP block. If communication between the parent GCM and the controller is disrupted for more than the FALLBACK time assignment at the RGRP block, the SGRP control in the RGRP block is disabled and the control algorithm will respond to the values assigned to the inputs of the RGRP block until communication is re-established.


SCHED

SCHED - Schedule Block

The SCHED block provides a method of scheduling regular time clock scheduling. The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains four SCHED blocks. Each block can have up to eight ON/OFF time period assignments. Each time period has its own active day assignments. Each ON/OFF period can be assigned to one of four outputs. Periods assigned to a common output will be combined together by the OR function. Holiday periods can be interfaced with the active schedules. User defined default fallback output conditions are available for periods when the time is determined to be not valid.

SCHED-Schedule Block configuration INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

SCHEDULE BLOCK

SCHED: 1

: :

ACTON NAME

1ONTM 1OFTM ACTD1 ACTH1 1AOUT 2ONTM 2OFTM ACTD2 ACTH2 2AOUT

8ONTM 8OFTM ACTD8 ACTH8 8AOUT

ENABL HOLI1 HOLI2 HOLI3 HOLI4 DOUT1 DOUT2 DOUT3 DOUT4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4


ACTON - Action - Selects whether or not the block is to be executed.

Selection includes:

NOT USED (default)

BLOCK USED

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the SCHED block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank).


SCHED


1ONTM - On time 1 - The hour and minute of the day the schedule is turned ON. The format is dependent on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00 am through 11:59 pm. (Default = 12:00 am).

1OFTM - Off time 1 - The hour and minute of the day the schedule is turned OFF. The format is dependent on the time type selected under PSI setup. The range is from 12:00 am through 11:59 pm. (Default = 12:00 am).

ACTD1 - Active days 1 - The days of the week schedule 1 is to be active. They are displayed as shown with the non-active days shown as XX.

XX XX XX XX XX XX XX = no days active. (Default).

XX MO TU WE TH FR XX = Monday thru Friday active.

Note: To add an active day, cursor over to the day and press return. A two letter abbreviation for the day activated will be displayed in place of the X's. To delete an active day, cursor over to the day and press return. XX will replace the abbreviation for the day.

ACTH1 - Active holidays or ignore holidays 1 - Assigns which holiday inputs schedule 1 is to be enabled, disabled, or ignored. The holiday inputs are displayed as H1, H2, H3, and H4, with the non-active days shown as XX.

XX XX XX XX NORMAL = Any holiday input (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) ON will disable this schedule (schedule = OFF). (Default).

H1 H2 H3 H4 NORMAL = Any holiday input (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) ON will enable this schedule. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 1ONTM and the 1OFTM attributes. ACTD1 assignments will be ignored.

H1 H2 XX XX NORMAL = Assigned holiday(s) (HOLI1 and HOLI2) ON will enable this schedule. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 1ONTM and the 1OFTM attributes. ACTD1 assignments will be ignored. HOLI3 and HOLI4 will disable this schedule (schedule = OFF). All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) OFF, schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 1ONTM and the 1OFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTD1 attribute.

XX XX XX XX IGNORE = All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) are ignored. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 1ONTM and the 1OFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTD1 attribute.

Note: To add an active holiday input, cursor over to the holiday input and press return. A two letter abbreviation for the holiday input activated will be displayed in place of the X's. To delete an active holiday input, cursor over to the holiday input and press return. XX will replace the

SCHEDabbreviation for the holiday input. NORMAL and IGNORE can be toggled by the use of the <Return> key.

1AOUT - Output assignment 1 - The number of the blocks output that schedule 1 controls.


NOT USED (default)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4









H1 H2 XX XX NORMAL = Assigned holiday(s) (HOLI1 and HOLI2) ON will enable this schedule. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 2ONTM and the 2OFTM attributes. ACTD2 assignments will be ignored. HOLI3 and HOLI4 will disable this schedule (schedule = OFF). All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) OFF, schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 2ONTM and the 2OFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTD2 attribute.

XX XX XX XX IGNORE = All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) are ignored. Schedule will operate


SCHED


according to the times assigned to the 2ONTM and the 2OFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTD2 attribute.

Note: To add an active holiday input, cursor over to the holiday input and press return. A two letter abbreviation for the holiday input activated will be displayed in place of the X's. To delete an active holiday input, cursor over to the holiday input and press return. XX will replace the abbreviation for the holiday input. NORMAL and IGNORE can be toggled by the use of the <Return> key.



NOT USED (default)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

Parameters repeated for holiday schedules 3 through 8.









SCHEDH1 H2 XX XX NORMAL = Assigned holiday(s) (HOLI1 and HOLI2) ON will enable this schedule. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 8ONTM and the 8OFTM attributes. ACTD8 assignments will be ignored. HOLI3 and HOLI4 will disable this schedule (schedule = OFF). All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) OFF, schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 8ONTM and the 8OFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTD8 attribute.

XX XX XX XX IGNORE = All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) are ignored. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the 8ONTM and the 8OFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTD8 attribute.

Note: To add an active holiday input, cursor over to the holiday input and press return. A two letter abbreviation for the holiday input activated will be displayed in place of the X's. To delete an active holiday input, cursor over to the holiday input and press return. XX will replace the abbreviation for the holiday input. NORMAL and IGNORE can be toggled by the use of the <Return> key.



NOT USED (default)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

Inputs

ENABL - Enable - The default is OFF.

HOLI1 - Holiday input 1 - The default is OFF.




DOUT1 - Default Output 1 - The default value for output 1 if the time value within the device is determined as being invalid.




Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1 - If all of the schedules assigned to this output are OFF, this output is set to a negative number of minutes


SCHED


to ON. If any schedule assigned to this output is ON, this output is set to a positive number of minutes to OFF. The range of values is from -255.0 to +255.0 minutes.

OUT2 - Output 2 - If all of the schedules assigned to this output are OFF, this output is set to a negative number of minutes to ON. If any schedule assigned to this output is ON, this output is set to a positive number of minutes to OFF. The range of values is from -255.0 to +255.0 minutes.



Applying the block Block Operation The outputs of the schedule block, instead of being digital values

(ON or OFF), are analog values indicating the remaining number of minutes to ON time or OFF time (within the -255 and 255 minute range).

If a schedule is calculated to be OFF then the corresponding output is a negative number indicating the number of minutes until it turns ON. If the schedule is calculated to be ON then the output is set to a positive number of minutes until the schedule is OFF.

Since the TAC MICROZONE II block convention states that an analog value less than or equal to zero is considered OFF, and an analog value greater than zero is considered ON, any block requiring a digital value from the SCHED block sees an OFF (negative number) when the schedule is turned OFF, and an ON (positive number) when the schedule is ON.

The purpose of using analog output values is mainly for interfacing with the OSS (Optimum Start Stop) block which requires the remaining time until ON or OFF for prestart and prestop calculations.

SCHED

The SCHED block operates as follows:

The INVALID TIME FLAG is checked. If it is ON, all of the outputs are set to the assigned default values. (Valid time is defined in the Block Basics section.)

Otherwise, if the INVALID TIME FLAG is OFF,The ENABLE input to the block is checked. If it is OFF, all of the outputs are set to -255.0 MINS (maximum time to ON) OFF.

Otherwise, if the ENABLE input is ON, each output (output1 thru output 4) of the SCHED block is checked to see which schedules are assigned to which block output.

If there are no schedules assigned to an output, that output is set to -255.0 MINS (maximum time until ON) OFF.

If one or more schedules are assigned to an output then each of those schedules are checked to see if they are enabled.

For a schedule to be enabled, in addition to being assigned to one of the outputs, the on time and the off time must be different, and the active days assignment must match the current day of the week.

If a schedule is active for this day and the current time is equal or later than the on time but before the off time, then the schedule is considered to be ON.

If none of the schedules that are assigned to an output are calculated to be ON, then the output is set to the number of minutes (negative) remaining until on time for the one schedule (of all schedules assigned to this output) that turns on first.


SCHED


no

yes

ENBLEblock

enabled ?

schedule 1 schedule n

HOLI1 HOLI2 HOLI3 HOLI4

holiday input(s)

ON?

ignore holidays

?ACTHn

active today

?

active for

holiday?day of week

ACTHn

calculate time to

OFF or ONcurrent time

time to ON/OFFntime to ON/OFF1

ONTMn

OFTMn

AOUT1

AOUTn

assign time to output

yes

yes

yes

no

no

: :

yes

ACTHn

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . .

. . . . .

yes

Time valid

?

DOUT1 DOUT2 DOUT3 DOUT4

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

Switch to default values

current time

If at least one of the schedules are calculated to be ON then the output is set to the number of minutes (positive) remaining until the off time for the one schedule (of all schedules assigned to this output) that turns off the last. The maximum value is 255.0 (four hours and 15 minutes). Times remaining lesser than 255.0 will be displayed as the actual time remaining to the nearest minute. The tenth digit will not change. Note: The outputs of the SCHED block will be updated once every minute except when one or more of the holiday (HOLIn) inputs have changed, the ENABL input has change to ON, or the block has been reset (a parameter change, system reset, cold reset, etc.). Changing the default inputs (DOUT1 through DOUT4) will not cause a reset.

If any of the holiday inputs are ON, then any schedule assignments to active days are ignored, and only those schedules that have an active holiday corresponding to the holiday input that is on are enabled.

If you desire a schedule to be active regardless of the value of the holiday inputs then the "ignore holidays" flag should be ON.

Application Notes If the on time for a schedule is later than the off time for a schedule then the SCHED block assumes that you wish the on time for this schedule to go through midnight.

For example: If the on time is set to 8:00 pm and the off time is set to 5:00 am for a schedule, and the schedule is enabled to be active on Saturday, then the schedule turns ON at 8:00 pm on Saturday and turn OFF at 5:00 am on Sunday. The schedule is ON Sunday until 5:00 am even if the schedule is not enabled for Sunday.

SCHEDWhen operating with INVALID TIME, the DOUT inputs are checked and outputs updated every block execution as opposed to once a minute. If a DOUTx is OFF the corresponding OUTx will be set to -255.0 MIN and if ON the the corresponding OUTx will be set to 255.0 MIN.

There are many ways to disable or turn OFF a schedule. If you think a schedule should be ON, but it is not, check the following conditions listed and verify that each is satisfied:

1. Is the ENABLE input to the block ON?

2. Is the schedule assigned to one of the outputs?

3. Is the on time different from the off time?

4. If all holiday inputs are OFF, is one of the active days equal to the current day of the week?

5. If any holiday input is ON and the "ignore holidays" flag is OFF, is the corresponding active holiday enabled?

6. If any holiday input is ON and the "ignore holidays" flag ON, is one of the active days equal to the current day of the week?

7. Is the current time is equal to or after the schedule's on time but before its off time?

8. Is the date and time in the TAC MICROZONE II set to what you think it is?

Scheduling Examples One of the best ways to understand the scheduling function is through application. The following examples will illustrate how the schedules set up within the SCHED block interact with one another. The interface between the SCHED block and the HOLI block is also illustrated. The description below starts with a "simple time of day schedule program." We will then add to this "schedule interaction with other schedules" and then describe the "interface with the holiday schedule block."

Simple time of day schedule

The sequence of operation is for a retail center which is using a digital output to luminate its OPEN/CLOSED sign. This store is open to the public from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM Monday through Friday every week.


SCHED


INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

SCHEDULE BLOCK

SCHED: 1ENABL HOLI1 HOLI2 HOLI3 HOLI4 DOUT1 DOUT2 DOUT3 DOUT4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4


9:00AM 5:00PM XX MO TU WE TH FR XX XX XX XX XX IGNORE OUTPUT 1

Schedule 1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

DIDV

INPUTS OUTPUTS


DO: 1 Physical Point

PARAMETERS

ACTON NAME

NC 1 NO 1 C 1

DIRECT ACTING SIGN LINE

Closed Open

1)

2)

3)

Simple time of day schedule program

The SCHED block is programmed as shown in the illustration.

1) The ACTH1 (Active holidays) are disabled by assigning the IGNORE attribute value.

2) Every Monday through Friday between 9:00 AM and 5:00 PM the values at OUT1 of the SCHED block will be a positive number (ON). The direct acting digital output block DO:1 will respond by energizing relay 1, luminescing the OPEN section of the sign. At all other times the values at OUT1 of the SCHED block will be a negative number (OFF). DO:1 will respond by de-energizing relay 1, luminescing the CLOSED section of the sign.

3) The default for output 1 (DOUT1) is assigned as OFF. If at any time the clock within the controller is determined as invalid, the output (OUT1) value will be forced to this value (OFF = -255.0). Valid and invalid time conditions are discussed in the Programming Basics section of this manual.

Note: Other schedules can be set up to interface with the other outputs of the schedule block for other applications (lighting control in the store, outside sign lighting at night, etc.).

Schedule interaction

Adding an abbreviated schedule for Saturday requires the use of a second schedule. The second schedule is set up for Saturday operation only from 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM (noon). The output for this schedule is also assigned to output 1. By assigning both schedule 1 and schedule 2 to the same output, a logical OR is performed on the two schedules before the output value is determined. The assignment of any of the possible eight schedules in the SCHED block to a common output allows for very complex schedule strategies.

SCHED

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

SCHEDULE BLOCK

SCHED: 1ENABL HOLI1 HOLI2 HOLI3 HOLI4 DOUT1 DOUT2 DOUT3 DOUT4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4


9:00AM 5:00PM XX MO TU WE TH FR XX XX XX XX XX IGNORE OUTPUT 1

Schedule 1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


9:00AM 12:00PM XX XX XX XX XX XX SA XX XX XX XX IGNORE OUTPUT 1

Schedule 2

Multiple time of day schedule programs The schedules above will perform as programmed every week of the year, year after year. To disable these schedules for holidays, scheduled shutdowns, or to use different schedules during certain time periods the HOLI (Holiday) Scheduling block must be incorporated.

Interface with the HOLI block

The HOLI block is used to schedule the start and finish date and time of holiday periods. The SCHED block is used to schedule the ON and OFF time of day schedules used during the holiday period. The next illustration shows the interface between HOLI block and the SCHED block. The HOLI block schedules are set up for the common holidays throughout the year. In this example all of the assigned holidays are one day in length. However, the holiday period can cover any number of days or months.

Note: Some holidays are celebrated on a particular day of the week each year while others are celebrated on the same date each year. This example has the holidays that fall on different dates each year scheduled first followed by the holidays that fall on the same dates each year. The New Year's Day holiday separates the two groups. Each year the dates for the first group (schedules before the New Year's Day holiday) need to be modified to operate on the proper dates.

The ACTH1 attribute for the active schedules in the SCHED block are set for XX XX XX XX NORMAL. The XXs indicate that none of the holiday inputs will activate the schedule. However the NORMAL setting means that any holiday input ON will disable the schedule. So, when the holiday input is ON, the schedules in the SCHED block will be disabled and the output will remain OFF (-255.0) during the period that the holiday input is ON.


SCHED


Note: During any holiday the regular schedule is OFF all day.

Regular and holiday schedules

Adding to our example for our retail center, we will add a new schedule for the Christmas shopping season. Between Thanksgiving and New Years Day we want extended hours to accommodate the Christmas shoppers. Starting the day after the Thanksgiving holiday we want to be open weekdays from 9:00AM to 9:00PM. On Saturday and Sunday we want to be open from 9:00AM to 5:00PM.

SCHED

The holiday period is divided into two schedules.

1) The first schedule (Christmas Season 1) covers the period from Thanksgiving to Christmas. This schedule is also included with the holidays which fall on different dates each year because Thanksgiving falls on a different date each year.

2) The second schedule (Christmas Season 2) covers the period from Christmas to New Year's Day. This period of time will remain the same year after year. The Christmas Season 1 and 2 schedules (Schedule 4 and 5) are both assigned to output 2.

3) A second SCHED block is needed to have two new time of day schedules for the extended weekday and weekend hours. We want a weekday schedule from 9:00AM to 9:00PM. On Saturday and Sunday we want a schedule from 9:00AM to 5:00PM.

4) The second SCHED block is enabled by OUT2 from the HOLI:1 block. The ACTH1 and ACTH2 attributes for the Christmas Season schedules in the SCHED block are set for


SCHED


XX XX XX XX NORMAL. When the SCHED:2 block is enabled the schedules will be activated. HOLI1, HOLI2, HOLI3, and HOLI4 inputs as assigned OFF values.

5) The ACTH1 attribute for the active schedules in the SCHED:1 block are set for XX XX XX XX NORMAL. The XX's indicate that none of the holiday inputs will activate the schedule. However the NORMAL setting means that any holiday input ON will disable the schedule. So, when the holiday input (HOLI2) is ON, the schedules in the SCHED block will be disabled and the output will remain OFF (-255.0) during the period that the holiday input is ON.

6) The UTIL block is used as a switch to switch between the regular scheduling of SCHED:1 to the extended schedules of SCHED:2. OUT2 of HOLI:1 is used to switch the utility block and to activate the extended hour schedule.

7) The input and output units (IUNIT and OUNIT) of the UTIL block are NONE. No units allows the analog values from the SCHED blocks to be passed through. This is important if this combination of schedules is to be used with the Optimum Start Stop (OSS) function. If OSS is not used DIGTL can be assigned as the IUNIT and OUNIT units or the SWITCH function can be replaced by the LOGIC "OR".

When interfacing holiday inputs with schedules in the SCHED block remember the rules:

1. XX XX XX XX NORMAL = If any holiday input (HOLI1, HOLI2, HOLI3,or HOLI4) is ON, this schedule will be disabled and the assigned output is OFF.

2. H1 H2 H3 H4 NORMAL = If any holiday input (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) is ON this schedule is enabled. The schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the nONTM and the nOFTM attributes. ACTDn assignments will be ignored. Where "n" is the schedule number.

3. H1 H2 XX XX NORMAL = Assigned holiday(s) (HOLI1 and HOLI2) ON will enable this schedule. Schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the nONTM and the nOFTM attributes. ACTDn assignments will be ignored. HOLI3 and HOLI4 will disable this schedule (schedule = OFF). All holiday inputs (HOLI1 thru HOLI4) OFF, schedule will operate according to the times assigned to the nONTM and the nOFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTDn attribute. Where "n" is the schedule number.

4. XX XX XX XX IGNORE = All holiday inputs (HOLI1, HOLI2, HOLI3,and HOLI4) will be ignored. This schedule is always active and will operate according to the times assigned to the nONTM and the nOFTM attributes on the days assigned to the ACTDn attribute. Where "n" is the schedule number.

SEQ

SEQ - Sequence Block

The SEQ (sequence) block allows the user to define up to six digital outputs to be controlled in two modes of sequencing operation: linear and binary. Each mode of operation has an optional interstage delay.

In the linear sequencer mode, the outputs are controlled in a first ON, last OFF mode. The linear sequence can be controlled in a direct acting mode or a reverse acting mode.

In binary mode, the outputs are controlled in a binary [1, 2, 4, 8] weighted sequence. They can be controlled in a direct acting mode or a reverse acting mode.

Typical linear sequencing applications include staged control of duct heaters, direct expansion cooling, and multiple cooling tower fans. Binary sequencing is often used in providing control of weighted electric heat loads. It can also be used on uneven commercial refrigeration compressor configurations to closely match capacity to required load.

The LCM/TAC MICROZONE II controller will contain two SEQ blocks.

SEQ- Sequence configuration

AI DELAY

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

SEQUENCE BLOCK

SEQ: 1 STAG1

STAG2

STAG3

STAG4

STAG5

STAG6

NSTGS NAME

ACTON


NSTGS - Number of stages - The assignment of the number of active stages.


NOT USED (Default)

ONE STAGE

TWO STAGES

THREE STAGES

FOUR STAGES

FIVE STAGES

SIX STAGES


SEQ

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the SEQ block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

ACTON - Action - Selection of either direct or reverse action. Direct action starts with all assigned stages OFF. Reverse action starts with all assigned stages ON.


DIRECT LINEAR 100.0% at input = All stages ON (Default)

REVERSE LINEAR 0.0% at input = All stages ON

DIRECT BINARY 100.0% at input = All stages ON (Default)

REVERSE BINARY 0.0% at input = All stages ON

Inputs

AI - Input - An input value from 0.0 to 100.0 %. (Default = 0.0%.)

DELAY - Interstage delay - The minimum time required between changes of the number of output stages that are ON. The range of values acceptable is from 0.0 seconds (no delay) to 255.0 seconds (4 minutes 15 seconds). (Default = 0.0 SEC.)

Outputs

STAG1 - Output stage 1 - The output of the first stage.

STAG2 - Output stage 2 - Used if two or more stages are assigned to NSTGS. The output of the second stage.

STAG3 - Output stage 3 - Used if three or more stages are assigned to NSTGS. The output of the third stage.

STAG4 - Output stage 4 - Used if four or more stages are assigned to NSTGS. The output of the forth stage.

STAG5 - Output stage 5 - Used if five or more stages are assigned to NSTGS. The output of the fifth stage.

STAG6 - Output stage 6 - Used if six are assigned to NSTGS. The output of the sixth stage.

Applying the block Linear Sequencing

The linear sequencing function provides a method in which a number of digital outputs can be controlled together in a logical sequence. Linear sequencing means the "first stage (digital output) ON" is the "last stage (digital output) OFF". The AI (input), which is an analog value, provides the information needed to determine the number of STAGES which are to be ON and OFF. The range of the input over which the output staging occurs is from 0.0 to 100.0%.


SEQ

DIRECT LINEAR Operation

Signal Increase

Signal Decrease

0 % -

50 % -

100 % - Stg 2 ON

Stg 1 ON

Stg 2 OFF

Stg 1 OFF

INPUT

Operation with two stages

DIRECT LINEAR mode of operation

Operation with six stages

Signal Increase

Signal Decrease

Stg 2 ON

Stg 1 ON Stg 2 OFF

CONTROL SIGNAL

(analog

value input)

Stg 3 ON

Stg 4 ON

Stg 5 ON

Stg 6 ON

Stg 3 OFF

Stg 4 OFF

Stg 5 OFF

Stg 6 OFF

Stg 1 OFF

100.0% -

83.3% -

66.6% -

50.0% -

33.3% -

16.7% -

0.0% -

TIME

DIRECT LINEAR mode of operation

REVERSE LINEAR Operation

The REVERSE LINEAR mode is similar in operation except that with 0.0% as an input, all of the assigned stages are ON and as the input signal increases, stage 1 is turned OFF, followed by the second stage until all of the assigned stages are OFF at 100.0%.


SEQ

LINEAR Operation

Operation with Interstage Delay

The next illustration shows the effects of an interstage delay incorporated with a three stage sequence. If the AI (input) makes a step change (signal increase) from 0.0 to 100.0%, the block algorithm calculates the following OUTPUT reaction to turn STAGES ON. The staircase effect is caused by the DELAY (interstage delay) attribute.

0 % -

100 % -

CONTROL SIGNAL

(analog

value input)

0 % -

33 % -

66 % -

100 % -

Stg 2 ON

Stg 1 ON

Stg 3 ON

Stg 1 OFF

Stg 2 OFF

Stg 3 OFF

TIME

CONTROL SIGNAL

(for reference ) Linear sequence

type of actionON

DELAYOFF

DELAY

OUTPUT STAGING ACTION BASED ON INPUT VALUE

CHANGE

Signal Increase

Signal Decrease

If the value at the AI (input) makes a step change from 100% to 0% (signal decreasing), the block algorithm calculates the OUTPUT reaction to turn the STAGES OFF. The staircase effect is caused by the INTERSTAGE DELAY attribute.

The sequencing algorithm establishes its operating conditions by dividing the NSTGS (number of stages) assigned equally between 0% and 100%. This establishes the 'ON values and the OFF values' for each of the stages.

As the AI (input) value varies between 0% and 100%, the sequence algorithm determines which output or outputs (STAG1 - - STAGn) should be ON or OFF. The OFF value for a given stage is equal to the ON value of the previous stage, providing a hysteresis between each stage. In the illustration, the first stage is 'ON' whenever the input value, at the block execution time, is 33% or greater (after the assigned interstage delay has expired). The second stage is 'ON' whenever the input value, at the block execution time, is 66% or greater, the first stage is 'ON', and the assigned interstage delay has expired. The third stage is 'ON' at 100%, when the second and first stages are 'ON', and the assigned interstage delay has expired. The third stage is 'OFF'


SEQ

whenever the input value, at the block execution time, is 66% or less and the interstage delay has expired. The second stage is 'OFF' whenever the input value, at the block execution time, is 33% or less, the third stage is OFF, and the assigned interstage delay has expired. And the first stage is 'OFF' at 0%, when the third and second stages are OFF, and the assigned interstage delays have expired.

The INTERSTAGE DELAY ON / INTERSTAGE DELAY OFF timers are active whenever a new output configuration is established. The configuration of the output cannot be changed until the proper timer has timed out and the need for a output configuration change still exists.

Example on how to use the block

The sequence block can be used to stagger-start a number of air handlers from one common weekly time schedule as shown below.

SCHED:1

SEQ: 1

LOOP: 1

RAMP ENABLE

LOOP: 2

RAMP ENABLE

LOOP: 4

RAMP ENABLE

DELAY 30 SEC

ON = 0 OFF = 100

LINEAR SEQUENCEAHU ENABLE SEQUENCE CONTROL

UTIL:1

This sequence block can be used to sequence, on and off, a cooling tower control sequence based on a need developed by a condensor water temperature control algorithm.

BINARY Sequencing


SEQ

The BINARY SEQUENCE provides an analog to digital convertor function which will select the digital outputs whose total binary weighted load rating relates directly to the control need. For each successive digital output order, the output rating will be two times larger than the previous rating.

DIRECT BINARY Operation

The following illustration shows how by controlling three loads, eight unique levels of output control can be achieved.

LOOP: 1SEQ: 1

DO: 1

STG -1

STG -2

STG -3

BOILER

DO: 2

DO: 3

BINARY SEQUENCESTAGED ELECTRIC BOILER

This control function will establish the proper output configuration in relationship to the input. Based on the NSTGS (Number of stages) assigned, the control algorithm will determine the total number of possible load configurations.

Number of Stages Load Configurations

2 stages 4 configurations






SEQ

The binary sequencing algorithm establishes its operating conditions by dividing the total number of load configurations equally between the 0.0 and 100.0%. This establishes the ON values and the OFF values for the stages and the stage configuration for each condition.

REVERSE BINARY Operation

The REVERSE BINARY mode is similar in operation except that with 0.0% as an input, all of the assigned stages are ON and as the input signal increases, stage 1 is turned OFF (the first configuration), followed by the second configuration until all of the assigned stages are OFF at 100.0%.

Binary with interstage delay

Interstage delay time can be incorporated with this sequence. If the AI (input) makes a step change (signal increase or decrease), the block algorithm determines the proper output configuration and then executes the next logical configuration after the DELAY time has expired. This will continue until the input value and the proper output configuration are equal. If the output configuration has been unchanged for a period greater than the DELAY time, the next calculation that requires a change in the output configuration will be executed immediately and the DELAY time will be activated before any further configuration changes will be permitted.


SEQ


UI

UI - Universal Input Block

The UI (Universal Input Block) provides the means of reading an analog or digital value connected to one of the physical input points. There are eight universal input points on an TAC MICROZONE II controller. Through the selection of the INPUT TYPE, the block configures the input hardware to interface with the hardware sensors or switches. The UI block name identification i.e., UI:1, UI:2, identifies the physical point on the TAC MICROZONE II.

ANALOG TYPE Standard curve types have been set up within the algorithm of the block to include the TAC Balco, Copper, Platinum and TAC 10K Thermistor (850 series) temperature sensors. These sensor inputs provide automatic unit scaling in DEG F and DEG C. Interface to 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA constant current and 0 to 5 VDC signals is also provided. Higher DC voltages, such as, 1 to 11 VDC can be interfaced using a proper signal conditioner.

DIGITAL TYPE Configured as a digital type of input, the block provides a means of reading binary data (dedicated contact closure status of a device) into the controller.

Such contact closures may be from differential pressure switches, flow switches, low temperature stats, contactor auxiliary contacts, or any other dry contact device.

The INPUT to the POINT is the result of the contact(s) and the logic wired. The relationship of the OUTPUT of the point block, versus the INPUT (closed or open contacts) can be inverted by selection. The INPUT to the POINT is the result of the contact(s) and the logic wired.

External Field Wiring

UIDigital

Configured Point

Auxiliary Contact

Field Wired Contact Logic

UIDigital

Configured Point

PULSE COUNTER The INPUT to the POINT is the result of the contacts opening and closing based on a count of quantities, i.e. Gallons/min, etc. The pulse counting configuration provides an output of the number of pulses counted and totalizes a quantity based on an assigned scaled factor. The pulse counter function will rollover (reset its output values to zero and start counting again) when the output achieves any assigned value up to 255.0 or the device is reset.


UI

UI - Universal Input configuration

Physical Point

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UNIVERSAL INPUT BLOCK

UI: 1

CONFG NAME UNITS SWITC FILTR SUNIT STIME

OFCAL OCTIM LOVAL HIVAL SCALE RESET

OUT TIMER DIAGN

COUNT

Note: Not all attributes are available for all configurations.


CONFG - Configuration - Selects the type of input device that is connected to the input terminals.


NOT USED (default)

ANALOG TYPES

THERMISTOR (10K only)

BALCO

COPPER

PLATINUM

4 to 20 mA.

0 to 5 VOLTS

DIGITAL TYPES

DIRECT DIGITAL (Terminal shorted = ON)

REVERSE DIGITAL (Terminal shorted = OFF)

PULSE COUNTER

Note: If an executing UI block, configured as one of the Analog Types, is reconfigured to a different Analog Type and the block or file is saved to the device; the first calculation of the new block may produce an incorrect output value.

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the UI block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

UNITS - Units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The units selected are displayed with the values for LOVAL (lowest output value), HIVAL (highest output value), OFCAL (offset calibration), SCALE (pulse scaling), and the


UI

OUT (output value). Note: For Thermistor, Balco and Copper configurations, DEG F and DEG C must be used to activate the proper input device scaling. (Default = NONE.)

SWITC - SWITCH TYPES - This parameter is active for THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER configurations only. The selection defines the action required when the user uses the push button featureon the room sensor.


NO SWITCH (default)

PUSHBUTTON SWITCH

PUSHBUTTON W/ CANCEL (two pushes)

CONTINUOUS SWITCH

FILTR - Filter - This parameter is active for the THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, COPPER, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to 5 VOLTS configurations only. The response of the output of the block in relationship to a step change at the input to the block. The filter function averages a series of sampled values. This is needed where certain inputs are so-called noisy, (values that tend to jump up and down).


NO FILTER (default)

NORMAL FILTER

MAX FILTER

SUNIT - Sample units - This parameter along with the value

assigned to the STIME (sample time) input determines the amount of time between samples of the input value which are added to the History Data table. This parameter is not available for Direct and Reverse Digital configuration.


HOURS (default)

MINUTES

SECONDS

STIME - Sample time interval - This input indicates the amount of time between samples of the input value which are added to the point history table. The units for this value are selected by the SUNIT sample units parameter. The range of values can be between 1.0 to 255.0. The Default = 1.0. If SECONDS is selected at SUNIT, the sample time is to the nearest second only. The fractional part of the STIME is ignored. If HOURS are selected, the sample time is to the


UI

nearest minute only. The maximum sample interval is 255 hours. This parameter is not available for Direct and Reverse Digital configuration.

Inputs

OFCAL - Offset calibration- When the input configuration equals THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER, this input indicates sensor offset calibration. The value assigned equals an offset that is added to the value read from the hardware input and then indicated at the block output. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

OCTIM - Occupy timer value - This input is active for THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER, configurations only. The value assigned equals the value in minutes from which the TIMER output is set to when a momentary short is detected across the input. The units displayed are in minutes. The range = 0.0 to 255.0 minutes. (Default = 0.0 MIN). This function is described in detail under the "Momentary override pushbutton switch" feature of this block.

LOVAL - Lowest output value - When the input configuration equals 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 Volts, this input indicates the desired output value for an input value of either 4 mA or 0 VDC. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0). Note: The difference between the values selected for LOVAL and HIVAL must not exceed 255.0.

HIVAL - Highest output value - When the input configuration equals 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 Volts, this input indicates the desired output value for the an input value of either 20 mA or 5 VDC. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

Note: The difference between the values selected for

LOVAL and HIVAL must not exceed 255.0.

SCALE - Scale constant - This input is active for the PULSE COUNTER configuration. The assigned value should equal the value (quantity) of each pulse. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).


UI

RESET - Reset the output - This input is active for the PULSE COUNTER configuration. When this input changes from OFF to ON, the output value will be reset to zero. (Default = OFF.)

Outputs

OUT - Output - Based on the type of configuration selected, this is the analog or digital value of the physical input.

TIMER - Occupied timer output - This output is active for THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER, configurations only. The current override time after the timer was started by a momentary short across the input. The range of values can be between 255.0 and 0.0 minutes.

DIAGN - Diagnostic flag - This value is ON only if the input value is not in the normal range specified for the standard sensors.

MODE Thermistor, Balco, Platinum, or Copper No Switch Pushbutton Switch Pushbutton W/ Cancel Continuous Switch 4 to 20 mA 0 to 5 Volts Digital/direct Digital/reverse Pulse

DIAGNOSTIC Sensor shorted or open Sensor shorted or open for more than 9 seconds Sensor shorted or open for more than 9 seconds Sensor open Input below 2 mA (with 250ž resistor) None None None None

COUNT - Count output - This output is active for the Pulse

configuration only. A totalization of the pulses since the initialization of the block. When the block is reset, this accumulated value is zeroed. This output can be overridden to an assigned value for any period of time specified by the override function. The block will continue the totalization of the pulses while under the override and the true accumulated value will be active when the override is cleared. The rollover value is 255.0.

NOTE: The COUNT output is not sent as part of the I/O values to the ZONE2 block in the parent GCM. If this value is needed in the parent GCM, this output value must be transferred via the WINDO block.


UI

Active Attribute Table

Applying the block Switch Types

Pushbutton Switch This selection can be made when a sensor is used as an input and the INPUT TYPE is THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER. The user can press the pushbutton on the room sensor for one to four seconds, and the TIMER output is changed from zero to the number assigned as OCTIM. When the pushbutton is released the TIMER output value starts to decrement toward zero. During the time that the input is shorted by the switch (up to four seconds) the OUT output retains its last known good value.

When the TIMER value reaches zero, it remains at zero until the input is shorted again for a period of one to four seconds and the operation is repeated. If the input is shorted anytime during the time that the TIMER value is decrementing, the TIMER output is reset to the number assigned as the OCTIM value and the value starts to decrement toward zero.

If the input is shorted for a period greater than nine seconds, an exception is reported to the parent GCM and the DIAGN (diagnostic) output value is turned ON.

Pushbutton W/ Cancel This selection can be made when a sensor is used as an input and the INPUT TYPE is THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER. The user can press the pushbutton on the room sensor for one to four seconds and the override feature functions as described above. However, when this option is selected, the user can press the pushbutton on the room sensor for four to nine seconds when the pushbutton is released the override feature will be cancelled, the TIMER output is changed to zero.

Continuous Switch This selection can be made when a sensor is used as an input and the INPUT TYPE is THERMISTOR, BALCO, PLATINUM, or COPPER. A two position switch can be wired to the same terminals as the sensor. This two position switch can be a freeze stat or other open/closed device. When the device is activated (sensor shorted for more than nine seconds), the TIMER output is changed from zero to the number assigned as


UI

OCTIM, and remains at that value until the short across the input is removed. When the short is removed the value is zero again. During the time that the input in shorted, the AV output retains its last known good value until the short is removed. No exceptions are sent to the parent GCM.

Thermistor Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with the TS-5711-850 and TS-570X1-850 series thermistor sensors. These room sensors contain a 10,000 Ω thermistor shunted with an 11KΩ ±0.1% resistor. The range of these sensors is from 20.0 to 140.0°F.

The UI block is typically configured as follows to interface with the TS-5711-850 and TS-570X1-850 series thermistor sensors.

IN 1

C

For wiring details see NW 8000 Hardware Installation Practices (F-23061-1),

0.0 0.0

THERMISTOR RM TEMP

DEG F NO SWITCH

NORMAL FILTER HOURS

1.0

Physical Point

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS


UI: 1


OFCAL OCTIM OUT

TIMER DIAGN

The TAC MICROZONE II controller can also interface with the TS-90220-850 and TS-90230-850 series of thermostats. These thermostats also provide an interface with the ASD bus. This ASD bus interface allows access for remote system monitoring and programming with the PSI (Personal System Interface).


UI

These thermostats also provide a remote setpoint. The interface of the setpoint is detailed under the potentiometer section.

Balco Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with the TS-8000 series Balco sensors. These sensors contain a 1,000 Ω at 70°F (21°C) Balco sensor. The range of these sensors is from -40.0 to 250.0°F.

The UI block is typically configured as follows to interface with the TS-8000 series Balco sensors.

Note: The UI block cannot be interfaced directly with the TS-8204 high temperature (200 to 400°F) Balco sensors.


UI

IN 1

C

For wiring details see NW 8000 Hardware Installation Practices (F-23061-1),

0.0 0.0

BALCO CWSupply

DEG F NO SWITCH

NORMAL FILTER HOURS

1.0

Physical Point

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS


UI: 1


OFCAL OCTIM OUT

TIMER DIAGN

Copper Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with the TS-5900 series copper sensors. These sensors contain a 1,000 Ω at 70°F (21°C) copper sensor. The range of these sensors is from -31.0 to 250.0°F.

Platinum Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with the TS-5800 series platinum sensors. These sensors contain a 1,000 Ω at 32°F (0°C) platinum RTD sensor. The range of these sensors is from -40.0 to 240.0°F.


UI

Current 4 to 20 mA Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with 4 to 20mA constant current transmitters. A 250Ω resistor placed across the input terminals converts the current to a DC voltage compatible with the input. The DC voltage applied at the input terminals must not exceed 5.0 VDC.


UI

0 to 5 VDC Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with 0 to 5 volt DC transmitters. The DC voltage applied at the input terminals must not exceed 5.0 VDC.


UI

When the AD-8961-220 voltage divider is used, a transmitter output of 1.0 VDC equals .45 VDC between the yel/blk and blu wires and 11.0 VDC equals 5.0 VDC between the yel/blk and blu wires.

Digital Input Example

DIRECT/REVERSE DIGITAL

Digital input type

The Universal Input point block configured as a digital input type is capable of monitoring digital (open/closed dedicated switches or contacts) types of hardware inputs. The maximum rate of change that this block can detect is a frequency not exceeding one change of state (lasting at least .5 seconds) every second. The Universal Input point block can configure the hardware terminals so that closed contacts equal ON (DIRECT DIGITAL), or open contacts equal ON (REVERSE DIGITAL).


UI

Note: If the UI block is configured to be Direct/Reverse Digital, then the History Data table consists of the last ten changes of state (OFF to ON or ON to OFF) of the input value and the date and time they occurred.

The following is an example of a Universal Input point block configurated as a digital input type. It monitors a FLOW SWITCH. The controller's point terminals are wired to the COM and the NORMALLY OPEN contacts on the FLOW SWITCH. The Universal Input point block is assigned to monitor these contacts and output whether the contacts are open or closed.

A Universal Input point block, (UI:3) corresponding to terminals IN3 and C is used in this illustration. The INPUT TYPE is set up for DIRECT DIGITAL, so that when the contacts within the flow switch are made (closed), the output of the point block indicates "ON."

Pulse Counter Example

The UI block, configured as a PULSE COUNTER can provide a means of monitoring pulse trains in the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The maximum pulse rate is one per second with a 50% duty cycle. The minimum pulse rate is one pulse every minute. The minimum pulse duration is .5 seconds (open and closed).


UI

The pulse train be interfaced with a dry contact wired directly to the input terminals.

The SCALE input allows scaling of the pulse rate output (OUT). The pulse rate is multiplied by the value this input. If SCALE is set to 1.0, the rate OUTPUT is equal to pulses/second.

The UNITS parameter provides a user assigned unit for the OUT output value. The assignment of units has not effect on the operation of the block.

The OUT output is the rate that the pulses are being monitored times the SCALE input value. If the SCALE input value is 1.0, then OUT is simply pulses/second. The minimum rate measureable is one pulse per minute. If no pulse is received within one minute the pulse rate output (OUT) goes to zero.

The COUNT output is a totalization of the pulses since the initialization of the block. When then block is reset, this accumulated value is zeroed. The block will be reset if:

1. The RESET input is switched ON. The outputs OUT and COUNT will be 0.0. The outputs will remain zeroed until the RESET input is switched OFF.

2. The block can be reset by pressing <ALT> R while in the block editor.The outputs OUT and COUNT will be


UI

zeroed and immediately resume operation from 0.0 the next time the block is executed.

3. The complete controller can be reset by using the RESET DEVICE function under the SYSTEM Functions menu of the PSI. Note, All of the blocks will be reset with this function.

4. Power to the controller is lost.

This output can be overridden to an assigned value for any period of time specified by the override function. The block will continue the totalization of the pulses while under the override and the true accumulated value will be active when the override is cleared. The rollover value is 255.0.

NOTE: The COUNT output is not sent as part of the I/O values to the ZONE2 block in the parent GCM. If this value is needed in the parent GCM, this output value must be transferred via the WINDO block.

If a pulse is not detected for a period of 64 seconds the output (OUT) will be zero. When the next pulse happens, after the 64 seconds, the output value calculated will be based on a passed period of 64 seconds.

Potentiometer Interface Example

The UI block can be interfaced directly with potentiometers. The total resistance of these potentiometers/potentiometer networks must be between 1000Ω and 20,000Ω.

The connections for the potentiometer include the use of the 5.1 volt reference supplied on the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The UI block is set up to use the 0 to 5 VDC configuration for reading potentiometers.

TIE -

TIE +

PSI

5.1V

IN 1

C

Wired to the 5.1Volt reference

Total resistance must be between

1K and 20Kž.

The basic potentiometer interface

Sensor/Setpoint interface with the

controller

As an example of the use of a potentiometer, the TS-90250-850 room sensor and setpoint will be detailed. The TS-90250-850 room sensor consists of a 10K thermistor sensor with a 11K shunt and a setpoint potentiometer/resistor network with a scale of 55°F to 85°F (10°C to 30°C). This room sensor works well with the TAC MICROZONE controller and it also provides an ASD bus interface for the PSI (TAC Personal System Interface).

Note: The resistor values shown for the TS-90250-850 room sensor are for reference and are used for this example only.


UI

Actual values may be different and each potentiometer networks should be individually setup as required.

The space temperature sensor (SPACE and COM) is wired into the controller and interfaced with a UI block configured for a thermistor type sensor.

The setpoint potentiometer circuit consists of a resistor in series with a potentiometer shunted with a resistor. The potentiometer networks used as inputs to the UI block, using the 5.1 volt reference, must be between 1000Ω and 20,000Ω in resistance. This potentiometer network is about 1.1K. The potentiometer network is interfaced to the controller as shown in this illustration.

To configure the UI block properly to read the setpoint potentiometer settings, the input voltage at two known points must be known. One method of determining this information is by reading the voltage directly from the thermostat. This can be done by configuring the UI point first as a DC voltmeter. The configuration above was wired to a controller as physical point #2. The UI:2 block is configured as VOLT 0 TO 5, and the setpoint was physically set to 55°F and the output of the UI:2 block indicated 4.2V. The setpoint was then physically set to 85°F and the output of the UI:2 block indicated 1.2V. Based on this information, the slope must be calculated so that the temperature at 0 volts and 5 volts can be determined.

The equation for any linear relationship is:

Y=mX+b

Where: m=slope, b=offset, Y=vertical scale (temp), and X=horizontal scale (volts). Note: b is usually referred to as the Y intercept.


UI

Slope = -30 3

55 - 85 4.2 - 1.2

== = -10Change in Temp. Change in Voltage

b=offset

So the relationship between the temperature and the voltage is Y=-10X+97 for this example.

At zero volts, Y=-10(0)+97 = 97 and at five volts, Y=-10(5)+97 = 47.

Here it was determined that the projected temperature at 0 volts would be 97°F and the projected temperature at 5 volts would be 47°F.

0 1 2 3 4 5

Volts DC (X)

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Degrees F (Y)

97° F

47° F

The UI:2 block can then be configured to interface with this setpoint potentiometer network. The block should be assigned the following attributes:

CONFG VOLT 0 TO 5

NAME _______

UNITS DEG F

FILTR NORMAL FILTER

SUNIT HOURS

STIME 0.0

OFCAL 0.0

LOVAL 97.0 DEG F

HIVAL 47.0 DEG F

Note: TAC recommends the following nominal values for typical TS-90250-850 setpoint potentiometer applications:

Fahrenheit scaling

LOVAL 94.7 DEG F

HIVAL 47.1 DEG F


UI

Celsius scaling

LOVAL 35.0 DEG C

HIVAL 8.0 DEG C


UTILITY BLOCK-General


The UTIL block provides a number of different utilities based on the chosen configuration. The UTIL block can be thought of as 13 different blocks, with inputs and outputs specific to the chosen configuration. The TAC MICROZONE II controller will contain 30 UTIL blocks. The selections include:

Not used (Default) NOT USED

Logic functions LOGIC

Math functions MATH

Selection functions SELECT

Limit function LIMIT

Thermostat function THERMOSTAT

Timer / delay functions TIMER

Momentary Start/Stop function MOMENTARY START/STOP

Drive function DRIVE

Pulse Width Modulation PWM

Flow detect function FLOW

Counter function COUNT

Process alarm PROCESS ALARM

Clock status STATUS

Each configuration is described in detail as if it were a separate block. They appear in alphabetical order as follows:

COUNT

DRIVE

FLOW

LIMIT

LOGIC

MATH

MOMENTARY START/STOP

PROCESS ALARM

PWM

SELECT

STATUS

THERMOSTAT

TIMER

© Copyright 2008 TAC. All Rights Reserved.Blocks 219

UTIL Counter Function

UTIL - Counter function

The Counter function provides a means of totalizing digital pulses. Based on the type of operation selected output 1 increments or decrements one number every time the digital value at DI (digital input) changes from OFF to ON. Output 1 continues to increment or decrement until the value of COUNT (count value input) is equalled, the RESET (reset input) changes from OFF to ON to reset the counter to zero, or the device is reset. Output 2 is ON for one count when the count is reset.

UTIL - Utility Block

Counter configuration


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is COUNT.

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the UTIL block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank.)

OPER - Operation - Selects the type of counting action the output will follow. The selections include:

COUNT UP (Default)

COUNT DOWN

Inputs

DI - Digital Input - The digital input. (Default = OFF).

RESET - Reset Input - The counter reset input. In the count up mode, OUT1 resets to 0.0. In the count down mode, OUT1 resets to the COUNT value. (Default = OFF).

COUNT - Count value - The value at which the output 1 value will reset and starts counting again. In the count up mode, OUT1 will be reset to 0.0. In the count down mode, when OUT1 decrements to zero, OUT1 will be reset to this assigned value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).



Outputs

OUT1 - OUTPUT 1- The count total

OUT2 - OUTPUT 2- The digital value is ON for one count when the OUT1 (Total) value rolls over or under the COUNT value.

Applying the block

The OUT1 (total) output is incremented or decremented by 1 on an OFF to ON transition of the DI (pulse) input.

If the RESET input is ON, OUT1 will be reset. In the count up mode, OUT1 will be reset to 0.0. In the count down mode, OUT1 will be reset to the COUNT value.

While the RESET input is ON, the DI (pulse) input is ignored.

Only the integer part of the COUNT value is used. The fractional part is ignored.

Simple totalization example.

This example provides a method of counting the number of time an air handler has been started. The UTIL block is configured as a COUNT function to count up from 0 to 250. The input (DI) is pointed to the Universal Input block which is monitoring the flow sensor of the air handler.

OUT 1

OUT 2

CONFG

NAME

OPER

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

COUNT

TOTAL

CARRY FLAG

DI RESET COUNT

COUNT UP

OFF 250.0

STARTS

UI:3:OUT

Output displays the number of time the DI input changed from OFF to ON.

If the operator wanted to inspect the air handler after 150 starts he can monitor the OUT1 value of the UTIL:1 block to see the number of time the air handler fan has been started. At the time he decides to inspect the air handler, he can RESET the block or edit the RESET input from OFF to ON and then back to OFF again to reset the OUT1 value to zero. He then can continue to monitor this blocks output for the next time to inspect the air handler.

Totalizing values greater than 255.

The COUNT function can count up from 0 to 255 before the output value will roll over a start from zero again. However,



more than one UTIL blocks can be cascaded together to generate totalization greater than 255. The next illustration shows how this can be accomplished.

UTIL:1 is setup to monitor the Universal Input block. With the COUNT value set as 99.0, the block will count up to 99, then on the next count the OUT2 (carry flag) output will switch from OFF to ON as OUT1 is zeroed. This change in the OUT2 (the carry flag) is used as the input to a second UTIL block. UTIL:2 is setup to monitor this carry flag and count the number of times it changed from OFF to ON. OUT1 of UTIL:2 will indicate how many times UTIL:1 counted to 100. By looking at the outputs of both UTIL:1 and UTIL:2 the total number of counts can be reconstructed. In this example the maximum number of 25,000 will be accumulated before the output value will roll over a start from zero again. By cascading another UTIL block into the sequence even larger numbers can be totalized.


UTIL Drive Function

UTIL - Drive function

The drive function provides the interface to a gear train actuator. There are two types of control available with this block, proportional positioning with and without feedback.

With feedback, the block requires feedback from the actuator as to its position. The feedback is acquired from a potentiometer at the actuator. The position indicated by the feedback and the calculated position are compared and the outputs are drive open and drive close respond accordingly.

Without feedback, the block positions the actuator based on its full stroke travel time. The block input is AI (Analog Input) 0 to 100%. The Travel Time ( 0 to 255 seconds) is the time for the full stroke travel of the actuator with used as a floating control. The outputs are drive open and drive close. A positioning algorithm is used to set a floating actuator to a position. A single pulse moves the actuator to a new position. The pulse size is calculated for the position change required based on the total actuator travel time to move across its stroke. The cumulative pulse total which is proportional to position is stored in the block.


Drive configuration

DRIVE

Drive Open

Drive Close

NO FEEDBACK

OUT 1

OUT 2

CONFG

NAME OPER

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1AI TTIME HYSTR


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is DRIVE.


OPER - Operation - Selects the type of drive action. The selections include:

NO FEEDBACK (Default)

FEEDBACK

Inputs

AI - Analog input - The analog input value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0%.)


UTIL Drive Function

TTIME - Travel time - If the selection is NO FEEDBACK, this is the value of the full stroke travel time of the actuator. (Note - The value assigned should equal the actual travel time of the slowest full stroke time. The travel time range is 0 to 255 seconds. (Default = 0.0 SEC.)

FDBAC - Feedback - If the selection is with FEEDBACK, this is the input for the feedback value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0 %.)

HYSTR - Hysteresis - This is the hysteresis value used to determine the difference between the drive open and drive closed action. It is determined as a difference between the AI (Analog Input) value and the FDBAC (Feedback) value if operating with FEEDBACK, or the calculated position if operating W/O FEEDBACK. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 50.0%. (Default = 0.0 %.)

Outputs

OUT1 - OUTPUT 1- The drive open output.

OUT2 - OUTPUT 2- The drive closed output.

Applying the block WITH FEEDBACK theory of operation

This positive positioning actuator drive function requires a feedback signal from the actuator to indicate the actuator's true position in relationship to the commanded position. The block calculates the desired position based on the input signal (0 to 100%) and compares this value to the actuators position (feedback signal). If the input value is greater than the feedback value plus the hysteresis value, then the drive open output is ON (the drive closed output is OFF). The drive open output remains ON until the feedback signal falls within the input signal and its deadband (hysteresis) value. If the input value is less than the feedback value minus the hysteresis value, then the drive closed output is ON (the drive open output is OFF). The drive closed output remains ON until the feedback signal falls within the input signal and its deadband (hysteresis) value. Whenever the input signal is within the hysteresis of the feedback signal both outputs are OFF.

Feedback potentiometer

Drive Open

Drive Close

OUT 1

OUT 2

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1AI FDBAC HYSTR


UTIL Drive Function

The feedback potentiometer within the actuator (typically 100 Ω) is used to supply the true position of the actuator. The diagram below shows a 20mA constant current power supply sourcing a 100 Ω potentiometer providing a 0.0 to 2.0 VDC signal as an input to the controller. The power supply can be supplied separately or derived from an unused analog output.

This input voltage is conditioned and scaled by the Universal Input block. As the acturator travels across its span, the feedback will provide indication of the true position of the drive shaft of the acturator.

WITHOUT FEEDBACK theory of operation

This floating actuator drive function does not use positive feedback of position. It calculates the position and is an indication of the actual position if the gear train actuator has the same constant rate of travel in both the drive open and drive close directions. The block calculates the position by knowing the rate of travel for the actuator whenever the actuator is driven open or closed. If the actuator does not hold a position over time, this function does not work. Two outputs are used to provide the actuator interface. One output drives the actuator open and the other drives it closed. If neither output is ON, the actuator holds that position. A hysteresis is provided to minimize the number of dither strokes.


UTIL Drive Function

The travel time attribute is an adjustment that has to be set to equal the full stroke time of the actuator. The function recalibrates whenever the actuator is driven to the full open or full closed position. After a reset of the TAC MICROZONE II controller, the actuator is driven full closed for the total travel time to establish the closed position. Then based on the input value and block will calculate its first drive condition.

After the function drives the actuator to what it believes is either a full open or a full closed position and the block input is 100% or 0% respectively, the corresponding (drive open or drive closed) output remains ON and continuously drives the actuator for the total travel time. The outputs then will go to the hold position (both outputs OFF). If during the time that the output is driving to locate the true end of stroke, the input value changes to a value within the control range, the output drive to locate the true end of stroke operation is terminated. This feature is to maximize the life of the actuator.

Notes:

When operating with NO FEEDBACK, small values for TRAVEL TIME (less than 30 sec.) and/or hysteresis less than 1.0% may cause oscillation occur at certain input values.

When overriding the block outputs, overriding such that both outputs maybe ON at the same time maybe harmful for the actuator.


UTIL Flow detection

UTIL - Flow detect function

The flow detect function provides all the logic for detecting if a fan or pump has successfully started. The inputs are commanded flow, monitored flow and delay time. The outputs are control shutdown and device control.


Flow detection configuration

If the commanded flow input goes ON, the device control immediately goes ON. If the monitored flow does not go ON within the time assigned as the max. verification delay, both outputs go OFF and remain OFF. The control shutdown will always be ON unless the flow was not detected after the device was commanded ON.


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is FLOW.


Inputs

DI - Commanded flow input - The commanded flow digital input. (Default = OFF.)

FLOW - Actual flow input - Monitored flow input. (Default = OFF.)

DELAY - Delay time - Maximum verification delay time. The maximum time difference acceptable from when OUT2 is ON to when the FLOW input is ON. Note: A zero (0.0) Value will always produce a control shutdown condition. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0 minutes. (Default = 0.0 MIN.)

Outputs

OUT1 - Control shutdown output - The control shutdown output.

OUT2 - Device control output - The device control output.


UTIL Flow detection

Applying the block

Theory of operation

Input 1 is the commanded flow signal. Typically output 2 (device control) follows the action of input 1. When input 1 is commanded ON, output 2 turns ON. When input 1 is commanded OFF, output 2 turns OFF.

Under normal conditions output 1 (control shutdown) is ON. The only time output 1 is OFF is during an abnormal system shutdown.

Output 1 is used for force shutdown of the control system if monitored flow is not detected before the maximum verification time has elapsed. This output would typically be ANDed with the occupied ON/OFF schedule signal.

Input 3 (DELAY) is the maximum allowable verification delay time in minutes. This value is the maximum amount of time that is allowed after input 1 goes ON that input 2 must indicate an ON condition before the outputs are forced OFF. If input 2 fails to indicate an ON state before the verification delay time has elapsed, output 1 and output 2 are forced to the OFF state. Output 1 and output 2 remain in this state until input 1 goes OFF. When input 1 is OFF, output 1 is reset to the ON state, input 2 remains OFF but it is ready to follow the action of input 1.


UTIL Flow detection

Flow interruption

monitored flow

commanded flow

>4 Sec.

reset ON

OUT2

OUT1

Max. verification

time (delay)

DI ON

OFF

FLOW ON

OFF

ON

ON

control shutdown

device control

OFF

OFF

If at any time after flow verification has been accomplished the monitored flow input (input 2) indicates OFF for more than 4 seconds, both output 1 and output 2 are forced to the OFF state. Output 1 and output 2 remain in this state until input 1 goes OFF. When input 1 is OFF, output 1 is reset to the ON state, input 2 remains OFF but it is ready to follow the action of input 1.

Remote manual override

If the device is commanded OFF (OUT2 = OFF) and the device were to be manually turned ON (through the use of a manual override), the changes at the FLOW input will be disregarded and OUT1 and OUT2 will not be affected.


UTIL Flow detection


UTIL Limit function

UTIL - Limit function

The LIMIT function block provides a means of restricting the range of an input by producing an active output only between the assigned limits. This block is typically used to limit analog values only. Examples include limiting the output signal of a loop or setpoint adjustor to prevent the overdriving of a connected load or minimum position control of OA dampers.


Limit configuration

Low limit

AI OUTMN OUTMX

OUT1

INPUTSUTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

LIMIT

High limit

OUTPUTS

CONFG

NAME UNITS

PARAMETERS


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is LIMIT.


UNITS - Units - Selection of analog units from the analog engineering units list. These units are applied to both the inputs and the output. (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

AI - Analog input 1 - The analog signal. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

OUTMN - Output minimum - Low limit. Although the actual input value may be below this value, the calculated output 1 value from the block does not go below this minimum. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

OUTMX - Output maximum - High limit. Although the actual input value may be above this value, the calculated output value 1 from the block does not exceed this maximum. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. If the OUTMX value is less than the OUTMN value the OUT1 value is the OUTMX value. (Default = 0.0.)

Outputs

OUT1 - Limited value output 1- The output value as a result of the calculation displayed with the assigned engineering


UTIL Limit function

units. This value does not exceed the OUTMN or OUTMX values.

Applying the block Theory of operation As an example of how the LIMIT BLOCK works, suppose that

the AI (analog input) to the block is monitoring a varying analog value.

As shown in the illustration the AI value varies between 68.5 and 81 over some period of time. This may be the result of some analog input that is being monitored via UI block or the output of some function within the controller.

70

80

AI value

Time

If the LIMIT BLOCK is set up as follows:

80.5

71Low limit

AI OUTMN OUTMX

OUT1

INPUTSUTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

LIMIT

High limit

OUTPUTS

CONFG

NAME UNITS

PARAMETERS

Where the OUTMX is assigned as 80.5, the OUTMN is assigned as 71. The output responds as shown.

OUT1 follows the AI value as long as it remains between the OUTMN and OUTMX values. However, whenever AI is greater than or equal to 80.5, the OUT1 value will remain at 80.5.

If the AI value is less than or equal to 71, OUT1 value remains at 71. The output is limited to active values between 71 and 80.5.

OUT1 value

OUTMX value

71

80.5

Time

OUTMN value70

80


UTIL Logic functions

UTIL - Logic function

The logic functions calculate some of the more common types of digital logic functions.


Logic configuration

OUT1

OUT2

CONFG

NAME OPER

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

LOGIC

DI1 AND DI2 AND DI3

DI1 DI2 DI3


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is LOGIC.

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the UTIL block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank)

OPER - Operations - Select the logic function


DI1 AND DI2 AND DI3 (default)

DI1 OR DI2 OR DI3

(DI1 AND DI2) OR DI3

(DI1 OR DI2) AND DI3

DI1 XOR DI2

LATCH

RS FLIP FLOP

CLOCKED RS FLIP FLOP

Inputs

DI1 - Digital input 1 - (Default = OFF).



Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1- The result of the logic selected.



OUT2 - Output2 - The inverse of output 1 (NOT output 1) except when LATCH, RS FLIP FLOP, or CLOCKED FLIP FLOP is chosen.

Applying the block The AND function The AND function is only ON when all of the inputs are ON at the

time that the block executes. OUT2 is the inverse of OUT1.

To use the AND function with only two active inputs the input not used should be assigned ON.

The OR function

The OR function is ON when any of the inputs are ON at the time that the block executes. OUT2 is the inverse of OUT1.

To use the OR function with only two active inputs the input not used should be assigned OFF.

The AND/OR function



The OR/AND function

The EXCLUSIVE OR function

The EXCLUSIVE OR function provides an ON at OUT1, when the inputs are not the same. The EXCLUSIVE OR function provides an OFF at output 1 only when all of the inputs are the same. OUT2 is the inverse of OUT1. DI3 (input 3) is ignored.



The LATCH function

DI1 (SET)

DI2 (RESET)

DI3

OUT1

OUT2OUT2 = DI3 except

when OUT1 = ON

LATCH

The timing diagram for the LATCH function is as follows:

Hold last DI3 Value

Pass DI3 Values

Pass DI3 Values

Pass DI3 Values

Pass DI3 Values

Hold last DI3 Value

Hold last DI3 Value

DI1 (SET)

DI2 (RESET)

OUT1

SET

RESET

SET

RESETRESET attempt

SET

RESET MODE

OUT2

RESET

TIME

INPUT (DI3) may be digital or analog values. Although the output (OUT2) displays the value as digital, the analog value will be passed through and can be viewed at a connecting block. The latest value at the input (DI3) will be latched in when the latch activates.

The RS flip flop function

DI3 (input 3) is ignored.

HOLD RESET

SET PROHIBITED

S OFF OFF ON ON

R OFF ON OFF ON

OUT1 NO OFF ON NO

OUT2 CHANGE

ON OFF

CHANGE



OUT1

OUT2

DI2 (RESET)

DI1 (SET)

SETRESET

ON (positive) edge triggered

SET

NO CHANGE SET and RESET

ON at the same time

NO CHANGE SET and RESET

ON at the same time

RESET RESETSET

RESET SET

The Clocked RS flip flop function

HOLD RESET

SET PROHIBITED

S OFF OFF ON ON

R OFF ON OFF ON

OUT1 NO OFF ON NO

OUT2 CHANGE

ON OFF

CHANGE

CLK

DI1 (SET)

DI2 (RESET)

OUT1

OUT2

DI3 (CLOCK)

SETRESET

CLOCK


CLOCK



UTIL Math functions

UTIL - Math function

The math functions can calculate the sum, difference, product or quotient of any two inputs. They can rescale a value by multiplying input 3 by the difference of the other inputs. They can also calculate the average of two inputs, the square root of a value, and act as a filter.


Math configuration

(AI1 + AI2) + AI3

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

MATH

AI1 AI2 AI3

CONFG

NAME OPER

IUNIT

OUNIT


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is MATH.


OPER - Operations - Select the math function

The selections include:.

(AI1 + AI2) + AI3 (Default)

(AI1 - AI2) - AI3

(AI1 * AI2) * AI3

(AI1 + AI2) / AI3

(AI1 * AI2) + AI3

(AI1 - AI2) * AI3

|AI1 - AI2| / AI3

( |AI1 - AI2|) * AI3

FILTER

IUNIT - Input units - This attribute does not apply for the FILTER function. The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with AI1, AI2, and AI3. (Default = NONE.)


UTIL Math functions

OUNIT - Output units - This attribute does not apply for the FILTER function. The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are be displayed with the OUTPUT. (Default =NONE.)

UNITS - Block units - This attribute applies only to the FILTER function. The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the OUT1 value. (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

AI1 - Analog input 1 - The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

AI2 - Analog input 2 - This attribute does not apply for the FILTER function. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default =0.0.) If this block is configured for the FILTER function the range of acceptable values is from -0.0 to 1.0.

AI3 - Analog input 3 - This attribute does not apply for the FILTER function. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default =0.0.)

FILTR - Filter factor - This attribute applies only for the FILTER function. If this block is configured for the FILTER function the range of acceptable values is from -0.0 to 255.0 SEC. (Default =0.0.)

DELAY - Delay - This attribute applies only for the FILTER function. The time in seconds between input sampling and calculation of a new output value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default =0.0.)

Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1 - Resultant. The range of values that will be available at this output is from -255.0 to 255.0 only.

Applying the block This block provides the math functions descibed below. Calculations are performed on the equations within the deepest level of () first followed by the next level and so forth until the complete equation is solved. One important thing to remember about these math functions is the ±255.0 number limits. Calculations exceeding these limits will result in errors. Review example shown below.

Example 1:

Addition

OUT1 = (Analog Input 1 + Analog Input 2) + Analog Input 3

where:

AI1 = 200.0

AI2 = 100.0

AI3 = -10.0

OUT1 = (AI1 + AI2) +AI3


UTIL Math functions

OUT1 = (200.0 + 100.0) + (-10.0)

OUT1 = (255.0) + (-10.0). The first calculation is limited to 255.0.

OUT1 = 245.0. The result is 245.0 instead of the 290.0 you might expect.

Function definition:

Addition (Analog Input 1 + Analog Input 2) + Analog Input 3

If only two inputs are to be summed, input 3 must equal a constant of zero.

Subtraction (Analog Input 1 - Analog Input 2) - Analog Input 3

If only two inputs are to be subtracted, input 3 must equal a constant of zero.

Multiplication (Analog Input 1 * Analog Input 2) * Analog Input 3

If only two inputs are to be multiplied, input 3 must equal a constant of one.

Division and averaging (Analog Input 1 + Analog Input 2) / Analog Input 3

If only one division is needed, input 2 must equal a constant of zero.

Scaling (Analog Input 1 * Analog Input 2) + Analog Input 3

Scaling (Analog Input 1 - Analog Input 2) * Analog Input 3

Example: To scale 50 to 100 from a LOOP to 0 to 100 for an AO, AI1 = the LOOP output value, AI2 = 50.0, and AI3 = 2.0.

Absolute value between two inputs and scaling.

|Analog Input 1 - Analog Input 2| / Analog Input 3

If only the absolute value from the difference between two numbers is needed, input 3 must equal a constant of one.

( |Analog Input 1 - Analog Input 2|) * Analog Input 3 Square root.

This is the same formula as the TAC NETWORK-8000 FLOW block. If the square root of only one input is needed, input 2 must equal a constant of zero and input 3 must equal a constant of one. The absolute value is taken of input 1 - input 2 to avoid the possibility of taking the square root of a negative number.

Note: Division by zero will output:

255 if the numerator ≥ 0


UTIL Math functions

-255 if the numerator < 0

FILTER The filter function averages a series of sampled values. OUT1 = (previous output value + (filter factor (present input value minus the previous output value))). OUT2 is not used with the FILTER function.


UTIL Momentary Start/Stop

UTIL - Momentary Start / Stop function

The momentary start / stop function provides the start and stop pulses for motor control or ON and OFF pulses for other uses such as, long delays, timed overrides, etc. When the DI (digital input) goes high, a start pulse is produced at OUT1 for the duration assigned to ONPLS (input 2). This output goes from OFF to ON then OFF again. When the DI (digital input) goes low, a stop pulse is produced at OUT2 for the duration assigned to OFPLS (input 3). This output goes from OFF to ON then OFF again.


Momentary Start/Stop configuration


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is MOMENTARY START/STOP.


TIME - Pulse time - The unit of time that the ONPLS (ON pulse duration) and the OFPLS (OFF pulse duration) operates in.


SECONDS (Default)

MINUTES

Inputs

DI - The digital input - (Default = OFF).

ONPLS - ON pulse duration - ON pulse duration (0 to 255) seconds or minutes. Note: The assigned units will not be displayed. (Default = 0.0).

OFPLS - OFF pulse duration - OFF pulse duration (0 to 255) seconds or minutes. Note: The assigned units will not be displayed. (Default = 0.0).

Outputs


UTIL Momentary Start/Stop

OUT1 - Output 1- The start pulse.

OUT2 - Output 2- The stop pulse.

Applying the block Momentary Start/Stop

Operation The start pulse commences on an OFF to ON transition at input 1 (the leading edge).

The stop pulse commences on an ON to OFF transition at input 1 (the trailing edge).

On start up or any type of reset, if the input value is ON, then a START pulse is generated. Likewise, if the input is OFF after a reset, then a STOP pulse is generated.

If the user inputs a zero for the ON or OFF Pulse Duration values, the corresponding START or STOP pulse will not be generated.

The minimum resolution of the START and STOP pulse duration is one- tenth of a second. However, fractions of a second can be used but a pulse duration less than the execution speed will always be as long as the execution speed.

While either the START or STOP pulse output is ON, changes to the input value are ignored. For example, if the input goes from OFF to ON, the START pulse output is turned ON. If, while the START pulse is ON, the input value changes from ON to OFF and then ON again, the output values remain unaffected.

If the input goes from ON to OFF while the START pulse output is ON, and the input is still OFF when the START pulse ends, then the block generates a STOP pulse at the next block execution. The same is true for the opposite case when a STOP pulse is in progress and the input goes from OFF to ON.

OFFON

INPUT

ON OFF

Output 1

Output 2

ON Pulse time

OFF Pulse time

OFFON


UTIL Process Alarm Function

UTIL - Process Alarm Function

The PROCESS ALARM function block provides a means of monitoring analog values and changing the digital output values whenever the input exceeds its assigned trigger and return points. This block functions with analog values only. Examples include: monitoring outdoor air for low temperatures, monitoring zone temperatures for extreme upsets, etc.


Process alarm configuration

PROCESS ALARM

AI TRIGR RETRN

OUT1

CONFG

NAME UNITS

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1 OUTPUTS

OUT2


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is PROCESS ALARM.


UNITS - Block units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the AI (analog input) and RETRN (return value). (Default = NONE.)

Inputs

AI - Analog input - The analog signal. The range of values can be between -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

TRIGR - Trigger value - The value, at which the OUT1 (output 1) changes to the ON state. If the TRIGR value is greater than the RETRN value, the alarm is a high alarm. If the TRIGR value is less than the RETRN value, the alarm is a low alarm. The range of values can be from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

RETRN - Return value - The value, at which OUT1 (output 1) returns to the OFF state. The range of values can be from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0.)

Outputs

OUT1 - OUTPUT 1- This value will be OFF as long as the input signal value remains outside the TRIG (trigger input) value.



However, whenever the AI (analog input) value crosses the TRIG (trigger input) value, OUT1 will be ON. Once the output is triggered ON, it will remain ON until the analog input value crosses the RETRN (return input) value. Note, the TRIGR value can be greater or less than the RETRN value.

OUT2 - OUTPUT 2- This value will be the inverse of the OUT1 (output 1) value.

Applying the block Theory of operation

As an example of how the process alarm function works, suppose that the AI (analog input) to the block was monitoring a varying analog value.

70

80

AI value

Time

As shown in the illustration the temperature being monitored is varying between 68.5 and 81 over some period of time. This may be the result of some analog input via the UI block that is being monitored or the output of some function within the controller.

If the UTIL block, configured as a process alarm is set up as follows:

80.5

71

PROCESS ALARM

AI TRIGR RETRN

OUT1

CONFG

NAME UNITS

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1 OUTPUTS

OUT2

Here the TRIG (trigger input) value is assigned as 80.5 and the RETRN (return input) value is assigned as 71.



The output would respond as shown:

The OUT1 (output 1) value will be OFF as long as the input signal value remains below the TRIG (trigger input) value. However, whenever the AI (analog input) value is greater than 80.5, OUT1 will be ON. Once the output is triggered ON, it will remain ON until the analog input value drops below the RETRN (return input) value.

The OUT2 (output 2) value will be the inverse of the OUT1 (output 1) value.

Note: The area between the trigger value and the return value is the alarm differential. If the analog input value is within the alarm differential when the block is reset (due to a block change, power restore, or a manual reset) OUT1 will be OFF until the analog input exceeds the TRIGR (trigger input) value.


UTIL PWM Function

UTIL - PWM Function

The PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) function block provides a time proportioned digital (ON/OFF) output. This output can be applied for both fixed or compensated duty cycle applications.

The PWM function block can be used for applications requiring the control of floating actuators and valves in response to a modulating output, such as a LOOP output.


Pulse Width Modulation configuration

PULSE WIDTH MOD

ENABL AI TIME

OUT1

CONFG

NAME TUNIT

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1 OUTPUTS

OUT2


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is PULSE WIDTH MOD.


TUNIT - Time units - This parameter along with the value assigned to the TIME input determines the amount of time for the complete period.


SECONDS (default)

MINUTES

Inputs

ENABL - Enable function - If this input value is OFF, OUT1 (Output 1) will be OFF and OUT2 (Output 2) will be 0.0. If this input value is ON, OUT1 will reflect the calculated condition of the block. OUT2 will equal the value of the time remaining when OUT1 is ON and 0.0 when OUT 1 is OFF. (Default = OFF.)

AI - Analog input - The analog signal. The range of values can be between 0.0 to 100.0. (Default = 0.0.)

TIME - Period time - This input value indicates the amount of time assigned as the total period of the ON/OFF cycle. The units for this value are selected by the TUNIT (Time Units)


UTIL PWM Function

parameter. The range of values can be between 0.0 to 255.0. The Default = 0.0. Fractions of a second can be used but if the total period of the ON/OFF cycle is less than the execution speed it will always be as long as the execution speed. Units will not be displayed but the value will be in the TUNIT assigned above. The maximum period interval is 4.25 hours.

Outputs

OUT1 - OUTPUT 1- The pulse modulated signal.

OUT2 - OUTPUT 2- This output will equal the value of the time remaining when OUT1 is ON and 0.0 when OUT 1 is OFF. The units for OUT2 will be equal to TUNIT. When OUT1 is calculated to be ON 100%, OUT2 will indicate the time remaining and will count down by tenths.

Applying the block The PULSE WIDTH MOD function provides the basic operation of a pulse width modulator. This block allows for a user assigned time base of 0.1 second to 4.25 hours (fractional seconds operation will be limited by the devices execution time). The (AI) input value (0 to 100%) establishes the percentage of ON time in respect to the assigned time base.

The operation of the block is controlled by the ENABL (Enable) input. If this input value is OFF, OUT1 (Output 1) will be OFF and OUT2 (Output 2) will be 0.0. When the ENABL input changes state to ON, OUT1 will start with the ON state for the calculated ON time (pulse width). OUT2 will equal the value of the time remaining while OUT1 is ON and the value will be counting down. OUT2 will equal 0.0 when OUT 1 is OFF. If AI input is 0.0 when the ENABL input changes state to ON, OUT1 will be OFF and remain OFF until the AI value is greater than 0.0.

As illustrated above, when the input (AI) equals 50% the output (OUTPUT1) modulates at a rate of 50% of the TIME value ON and 50% of the TIME value OFF. This will be repeated as long as the ENABL input is ON. The input value can be changed and the pulse width will be adjusted to reflect the corresponding relationship.


UTIL PWM Function

The chart below shows how the output ON and OFF times will be affected by varying input values.

AI value (%)

ON time

OFF time

0.0 10.0 25.0 33.3 50.0 66.6 75.0

100.0

OFF all the time

ON all the time

.1 (TIME)

.25 (TIME)

.33 (TIME)

.5 (TIME)

.66 (TIME)

.75 (TIME)

.9 (TIME)

.75 (TIME)

.66 (TIME)

.5 (TIME)

.33 (TIME)

.25 (TIME)

This block can be applied for time proportioned control of two positioned controlled devices designed for ON/OFF time proportioned control.

It can provide control for both fixed or compensated duty cycle applications.

This block can be also be used for applications requiring the control of floating actuators and valves in response to a modulating output, such as a LOOP output.

Time Proportioned Control

The PULSE WIDTH MOD function will provide a time proportioned control output for the control of electric resistance heaters, two position floating actuators, heat motor actuators, solenoid valves, etc. designed for ON/OFF time proportioned control.

The value assigned for the TIME depends on the application. For two position floating actuators and wax motor actuators the TIME value should equal the time required for the actuator to travel its full stroke. For control of electric resistance heaters and solenoid valves, the value assigned for the TIME depends on the application and the response of the equipment being controlled.

In the following illustrations, a two position spring returned actuator is being controlled by a proportional control loop. The average actuator stroke time is approximately 90 seconds.


UTIL PWM Function

ON

90.0

ACTON NAME

DIRECT ACTING HEATING

DIDV


DO: 1

Physical Point

PARAMETERS

NC 1 NO 1 C 1

AV

LOOP: 1

PARAMETERS

PULSE WIDTH MOD HEATING SECONDS

ENABL AI TIME

OUT1

CONFG

NAME

TUNIT

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCKUTIL: 1

OUT2

ACTUATOR

24 VAC power source

LOOP BLOCK

The output response from the PULSE WIDTH MOD function will be in corresponding relationship to the input as shown in the chart below.

Fixed Duty Cycle Control

This block will provide a duty cycled digital output with a fixed ON time and a fixed OFF time.


UTIL PWM Function

The total period for the cycle (ON time plus the OFF time) is determined by the TUNIT selected and the TIME value assigned. The fixed ON time is determined by the value, equal to the percentage of the total period, assigned as the AI input. The duty cycle routine is started when the input, ENABL, is changed to the ON state.

The cycle will commence with the ON state synchronized with the input ENABL change. When the ENABL is ON, the output OUT1 will toggle ON and OFF at this fixed frequency until the ENABL is changed to OFF. OUT1 will be set to the OFF state whenever the ENABL is OFF. When the function is disabled, (ENABL = OFF) OUT1 will go OFF regardless of where it is in its period of operation. NOTE - Short cycle protection for equipment is not supported within the function of this block.

Compensated Duty cycle

By interfacing the PULSE WIDTH MOD function with a RESET block; compensated duty cycle is achieved. This configuration is shown below.

OFF

PULSE WIDTH MOD HT ENABL HOURS

ENABL AI TIME

OUT1

CONFG

NAME

TUNIT

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1 OUTPUTS

OUT2

SCHED:1:OUT1

2.0

ON ON

OUT

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

RESET BLOCK

RESET: 1

ACTON NAME IUNIT

OUNIT SCALE


20°F 75°F 125

135°F 200°F

Outdoor Air Temperature

REVERSE ACTING HT RESET

DEG F %

÷100

RESET SETPOINT

VALUE (Compensation

Value)

Heating Control Loop Enable Signal

The RESET block is set up to provide the compensation variable for the ON time portion of the period. Refer to the description of the RESET block for application and setup details.


UTIL PWM Function

OFF

OFF

OFF

PERIOD

ON

50.0 % 100.0 %

Compensation value determined by the RESET block

TIME

ENABL

OUTPUT 1

OFF

ON

40.0 °F

0.0 °F

AI Value

ON

This example illustrates how the PULSE WIDTH MOD function can be used to duty cycle the heating mode of an electric controlled heat exchanger. For this example, the heating mode will be enabled for an occupied period of the day (SCHED:1:OUT1). Through the use of the PULSE WIDTH MOD function we will only allow the use of electrical energy for heating during a controlled portion of a two hour period. The mass of the media and the typical heat loss rate are such that the system can coast for approximately one hour before the heat loss can become noticeable. The sizing of the heating equipment is such that the lost temperature can be recovered and control maintained within one hour. However, as the outdoor air temperature drops below 40 °F, the losses become noticeable and the equipment needs to operate longer to compensate for these losses. When the outdoor air temperature drops to 0 °F, it is necessary to have the heating equipment enabled 100% of the time. With the use of the RESET block, and the applied compensated duty cycle feature, we can increase the time that the heating is enabled as the outdoor air temperature decreases until the duty cycle feature is totally removed from the sequence of operation.

PWM for an actuator

Two UTILITY blocks configured for the PULSE WIDTH MOD will provide a pulse width modulating function that can be used for applications requiring the control of floating actuators and valves in response to a modulating output, such as a LOOP output. One UTILITY block will provide a pulse width modulating increasing function and the second UTILITY block will provide a pulse width modulating decreasing function. This allows for different increase/decrease stroke time considerations.


UTIL PWM Function

UTILITY MATH blocks are used to separate and scale the increasing and decreasing signals for the PWM control functions.

The block reads the analog input [AINP] and calculates the proportional ON time for the OUT1 and OUT2 outputs. This calculation is updated every time the block is executed.

The control point is at 50% output from the control loop. It is wise to design in some area around the control point in which the actuator will not increase or decrease in position. This is the deadband. In the next example there is a 6% deadband. This means that if the output from the loop is between 47% and 53%, both outputs OUT1 and OUT2 will remain OFF. When the analog input reaches 76.5% (halfway between 53% and 100%) then the OUT1 output cycle will be ON for 3/4 of the device time and OFF for 1/4 of the device time. Likewise when the analog


UTIL PWM Function

input reaches 23.5% the OUT2 output will be ON for 3/4 of the device time and OFF for 1/4 of the device time. The OUT1 output will be on all the time if the input reaches 100%. When the input reaches 0% the output OUT2 will be ON all the time.

ON

30.0

ON

30.0


ACTON NAME

DIRECT ACTING HT INC

CONFG NAME OPER IUNIT OUNIT

MATH HT INC (AI1 - AI2) AI3 NONE NONE

DIDV

INPUTS OUTPUTS


DO: 1

Physical Point

PARAMETERS

NC 1 NO 1 C 1

DV

OUTPUTSDO: 2

Physical Point

NC 2 NO 2 C 2

DIRECT ACTING HT DEC

AI1 AI2 AI3

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

PARAMETERS

CONFG NAME OPER IUNIT OUNIT

MATH HT INC (AI1 AI2) + AI3 NONE NONE

AI1 AI2 AI3

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 2

PARAMETERSACTON NAME

DI

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

PULSE WIDTH MOD HT INC SECONDS

ENABL AI TIME

OUT1

CONFG

NAME

TUNIT

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCKUTIL: 3 OUTPUTS

OUT2

PULSE WIDTH MOD HT DEC SECONDS

ENABL AI TIME

OUT1

CONFG

NAME

TUNIT

INPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCKUTIL: 4 OUTPUTS

OUT2

*

*

LOOP:1:REVAV

53

2.127

LOOP:1:REVAV

2.127

-100.0


UTIL PWM Function

One of the advantages for using the PWM function is that it allows for direct connection to many gear train actuators without a solid state drive CP-8301. It also allows for direct connection to competitors actuators.

A disadvantage is that this is a floating control action and it gets all feedback from the variable it is controlling and not the actuator directly. The PWM approach requires two DO point blocks while the solid state approach requires one AO point block.


UTIL PWM Function


UTIL Select function

UTIL - Selection function general

The selection function can act as a single pole double throw switch for analog and digital values. It can also select the high input and the low input values and perform a loop inversion function. Each function is described as a separate block.



Switch

UTIL - Selection block, Switch function

The SWITCH selection acts as a single pole double throw switch for analog and digital values.


Switch Selection configuration IN1

IN2 SLECT

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

OUT2

SWITCH

SELECTCONFG

NAME OPER

IUNIT

OUNIT


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is SELECT


OPER - Block operation - This parameter selects the type of signal selecting operation desired by the block. The selections include:

SWITCH (Default)

HIGH LOW SELECT

LOOP INVERT

Select SWITCH for the single pole double throw switch for analog and digital values.

IUNIT - Input units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the input values. (Default = NONE)

OUNIT - Output units - The Units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the output values. (Default = NONE)

Inputs

IN1 - Input 1 - The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0)



Switch

IN2 - Input 2 - The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0)

SLECT - Input selection - (Default = OFF)

Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1 - The value at OUT1 = the value at IN1 when SLECT = OFF and the value at OUT1 = the value at IN2 when SLECT = ON.

OUT2 - Output 2 - The value at OUT2 = the value at IN2 when SLECT = OFF and the value at OUT2 = the value at IN1 when SLECT = ON.

Applying the block

The input to output relationship based on the value at SLECT is as follows:

OUT1 (output 1) = IN1 (input 1) when SLECT is OFF

OUT2 (output 2) = IN2 (input 2) when SLECT is OFF

OUT1 (output 1) = IN2 (input 2) when SLECT is ON

OUT2 (output 2) = IN1 (input 1) when SLECT is ON



High/Low Selection

UTIL - Selection block, High/Low Selection

The HIGH/LOW selection produces a value at output 1 which is equal to the highest value of the three inputs and a value at output 2 which is equal to the lowest value of the three inputs. The high/low signal selector function is typically for analog values. Used with digital values, OUT1 performs an OR function of the three inputs and OUT2 performs an AND function of the three inputs.


High/Low Selection configuration


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is SELECT.



SWITCH (Default)

HIGH LOW SELECT

LOOP INVERT

Select HIGH LOW SELECT for the high and low signal selection function.

UNITS - Input and output units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units here are displayed with the inputs (IN1, IN2, and IN3) and outputs (OUT1 and OUT2) values. (Default = NONE).

Inputs

IN1 - Input 1 - The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).



High/Low Selection



Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1 - The highest value at the inputs (IN1, IN2, and IN3).

OUT2 - Output 2 - The lowest value at the inputs (IN1, IN2, and IN3).

Applying the block In this example, OUT1 (output 1) is 80.7. This is the highest value of the values at the inputs (IN1, IN2, and IN3). OUT2 (output 2) is -100.0. This is the lowest value of the values at the inputs (IN1, IN2, and IN3).

Multiple UTIL blocks can be configured to select the highest and the lowest values of many values. This illustration shows how the highest and the lowest values of nine inputs can be deduced.



Loop invert function

UTIL - Selection block, Loop invert function

The LOOP INVERT selection produces a value at output 1 which is equal to the value of input 3 minus input 1 and a value at output 2 which is equal to the value of input 3 minus input 2. The loop invert signal selector function is for analog values only.


Loop Invert configuration

LOOP INVERT

IN1 IN2 IN3

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS


OUT2

SELECTCONFG

NAME OPER

UNIITS

input 3 - input 2

input 3 - input 1


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is SELECT



SWITCH (Default)

HIGH LOW SELECT

LOOP INVERT

Select LOOP INVERT for the loop invert signal selection function.

UNITS - Input and output units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the input and output values. (Default = NONE).

Inputs





Loop invert function


Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1 - OUT1 (output 1) = IN3 (input 3) minus IN1 (input1).

OUT2 - Output 2 - OUT2 (output 2) = IN3 (input 3) minus IN2 (input2).

Applying the block In this example, the output 0.0 to 100.0% from a LOOP block is inverted to 100.0 to 0.0%. This is accomplished by the IN1 (input 1) value subtracted from 100.0. The chart shows this relationship. OUT1 (output 1) = IN3 (input 3) minus IN1 (input1).


UTIL Status Function

UTIL - Status function

The Status function provides a monitor of the time conditions within the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The output of the UTIL block configured for the STATUS function will be ON unless an invalid time is detected. The output will be OFF for as long as an invalid time condition remains.


Status configuration

OUT 1

CONFG

NAME

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

STATUS


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is STATUS.


Inputs

There are no inputs to this block.

Outputs

OUT1 - OUTPUT 1- This output is ON if the time is valid and is OFF if the time is not valid. See conditions for valid times below.

Applying the block The Status function monitors the time conditions of the system clock within the TAC MICROZONE II controller. The output of the UTIL block configured for the STATUS function will be ON unless an invalid time is detected. The output will be OFF for as long as an invalid time condition remains.

See the VALID TIME CONDITIONS under TIME AND DATE topic in the PROGRAMMING BASICS section.


UTIL Status Function

This function can be used for fallback applications in which syncronization with the actual time of day is important.

OUT 1

CONFG

NAME

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

STATUS

IN1 IN2 SLECT

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 2

OUT2

Fallbank value

OFF (invalid time)

If the time is determined to be invalid the UTIL:1:OUT1 value will be OFF and UTIL:2 select function will switch to the fallback value.

Normal operation signal

Control signal (Valid time = signal from IN2, Invalid time = signal from IN1)

Note: Time related functions i.e. the schedule block (SCHED)

monitors for invalid times and will default on its own.


UTIL Thermostat function

UTIL - Thermostat function

The thermostat function provides two position on/off control with hysteresis. The block inputs are input, setpoint, and hysteresis. Both a direct acting and a reverse acting output are provided.


Thermostat configuration

THERMOSTAT

Direct Acting

Reverse Acting

AI SP INDIF

OUT1

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS


OUT2

CONFG

NAME UNITS


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is THERMOSTAT.


UNITS - Input units - The units selected are from the engineering units list. The analog engineering units are displayed with the input and output values. (Default = NONE)

Inputs

AI - Analog Input - The signal input to the thermostat block. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0)

SP - Setpoint - The setpoint for the thermostat block. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0)

INDIF - Input differential - The hysteresis value. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0)

Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1 - The direct acting output.

OUT2 - Output 2 - The reverse acting output.

Applying the block Thermostat function

Operation The two position thermostat block will control two position HVAC units around a setpoint value. The input differential is the band around the setpoint that you wish to control within. For example,


UTIL Thermostat function

it your setpoint value is 72° F and the input differential is 4° F, your control band is from 70° F to 74° F.

Setpoint 72° F Differential 4° F

74 ° F

70° F

NOTE: The differential is always symmetric around the setpoint value.

Output OUT1 turns ON when the input value rises above the SP + 1/2 the INDIF value. Output OUT1 turns OFF again when the input value falls below the SP - 1/2 the INDIF value.

OUT1 with an increasing input signal

Output OUT2 turns ON when the input value falls below the SP -1/2 the INDIF value. Output OUT2 turns OFF again when the input value rises above the SP + 1/2 the INDIF value.


UTIL Timer function-General

UTIL - Timer function-General

The timer function of the utility block provides minimum ON and/or OFF functions and ON delay and/or OFF delay functions. Six different timer functions are provided. They include:

ON DELAY - Two inputs with ON DELAY only.

OFF DELAY - Two inputs with OFF DELAY only.

DUAL DELAY - Single input with separate ON delay and OFF delays.

MIN ON - Two inputs with a MINimum ON timer.

MIN OFF - Two inputs with a MINimum OFF timer.

DUAL MIN - Single input with a minimum ON timer and a minimum OFF timer.

Each function is described as a separate block.


UTIL Timer function ON delay

UTIL - Timer function, ON delay

This timer function delays the ON transition of a logical state for the specified time. Each block contains two separate ON delay timer functions. Each function shares a common DELAY time.

Input 1 is the digital signal and the third input is the delay time in minutes. Output 1 follows the state of input 1 and has a delay of OFF to ON based on the assigned delay time at input 3.

Input 2 is the digital input of a separate delay timer. Output 2 follows the state of input 2 and has a delay of OFF to ON based on the assigned delay time at input 3.


Timer - ON delay configuration

ON DELAY

DI1 DI2 DELAY

OUT1

CONFG

NAME OPER

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

TIMER

OUT2

DELAY

DELAY


CONFG - Configuration - The selection is TIMER.


OPER - Operation - ON DELAY

Inputs

DI1 - INPUT 1 - The input for the first delay function. (Default = OFF)

DI2 - INPUT 2 - The input for the second delay function. (Default = OFF)

DELAY - INPUT 3 - The delay time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)

Outputs

OUT1 - Output 1- The delayed output in response to input 1.



UTIL Timer function ON delay

Applying the block Timer - ON delay

Operation This ON DELAY timer function delays the ON transition of a logical state for the specified time. The block contains two separate ON delay functions sharing a common DELAY time.

DI1 is the digital signal and the third input (DELAY) is the delay time in minutes. OUT1 follows the state of DI1 and has a delay of OFF to ON based on the assigned delay time at input 3 (DELAY).

DI2 is the digital input of the second delay timer. OUT2 follows the state of DI2 and has a delay of OFF to ON based on the assigned delay time at input 3 (DELAY).


UTIL Timer function OFF delay

UTIL - Timer function, OFF delay

This timer function delays the OFF transition of a logical state for the specified time. Each block contains two separate OFF delay timer functions. Each function shares a common DELAY time.

Input 1 is the digital input and the third input is the delay time in minutes. Output 1 follows the state of input 1 and has a delay of ON to OFF based on the assigned delay time at input 3.

Input 2 is the digital input of a separate delay timer. Output 2 follows the state of input 2 and has a delay of ON to OFF based on the assigned delay time at input 3.


Timer - OFF delay configuration

OFF DELAY

DI1 DI2 DELAY

OUT1

CONFG

NAME OPER

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

TIMER

OUT2

DELAY

DELAY




OPER - Operation - OFF DELAY

Inputs



DELAY - INPUT 3 - The delay time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)

Outputs




UTIL Timer function OFF delay

Applying the block Timer - OFF delay

Operation This OFF DELAY timer function delays the OFF transition of a logical state for the specified time. The block contains two separate OFF delay functions sharing a common DELAY time.

DI1 is the digital signal and the third input (DELAY) is the delay time in minutes. OUT1 follows the state of DI1 and has a delay of ON to OFF based on the assigned delay time at input3 (DELAY).

DI2 is the digital input of the second delay timer. OUT2 follows the state of DI2 and has a delay of ON to OFF based on the assigned delay time at input 3 (DELAY).

OFF

OFF

OFF Delay Time

INPUT 1

OUTPUT 1

ON

ON

OFF

TIME

OFF

INPUT 2

OUTPUT 2

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF OFFOFF Delay Time


UTIL Timer function Dual delay

UTIL - Timer function, Dual delay

The ON delay/OFF delay function delays the transition of a logical state for the specified time (0 to 255 minutes).

Input 1 is the digital input and the second input is the ON time in minutes. Input 3 is the OFF time in minutes. Output 1 follows the state of input 1 and has a delay of OFF to ON based on the assigned ON delay time and a delay of ON to OFF based on the assigned OFF delay time. Output 2 is the inverse of output 1.


Timer - Dual delay configuration

ON delay OFF delay

DUAL DELAY

DI1 ONDLY OFDLY

OUT1

CONFG

NAME OPER

INPUTS OUTPUTS

PARAMETERS

UTILITY BLOCK

UTIL: 1

TIMER

OUT2




OPER - Operation - DUAL DELAY

Inputs

DI - Digital input - The input for the delay function. (Default = OFF)

ONDLY - ON delay time - The delay ON time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)

OFDLY - OFF delay time - The delay OFF time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)

Outputs


OUT2 - Output 2- The inverse of output 1.


UTIL Timer function Dual delay

Applying the block Timer - Dual delay

Operation The DUAL DELAY timer function provides for both the ON delay and the OFF delay functions. This block delays the transition of a logical state (DI value) for the specified time (0 to 255 minutes). DI is the digital input and the second input (ONDLY) is the ON time in minutes. Input 3 (OFDLY) is the OFF time in minutes. OUT1 follows the state of the DI value and has a delay of OFF to ON based on the assigned ON delay time and a delay of ON to OFF based on the assigned OFF delay time. OUT2 is the inverse of OUT1.

INPUT 1

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

TIME

ON Delay Time

OFF Delay Time

OFF

OFF

ON


UTIL Timer function Min ON delay

UTIL - Timer function, Min ON

This delay function prevents an output from changing from ON to OFF for a specified time. Each block contains two separate MIN ON delay timer functions. Each function shares a common DELAY time.

Input 1 is the digital input and the third input is the minimum ON time in minutes. Output 1 follows the state of input 1 with the ON transition but, output 1 does not allow a change to the OFF condition until the assigned time at input 3 has elapsed.

Input 2 is the digital input of a separate delay timer. Output 2 follows the state of input 2 with the ON transition but, output 2 does not allow a change to the OFF condition until the assigned time at input 3 has elapsed.


Timer - Min ON delay configuration




OPER - Operation - MIN ON

Inputs



MNON - INPUT 3 - The minimum ON time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)


UTIL Timer function Min ON delay

Outputs



Applying the block Timer - Min ON delay

Operation The MIN ON delay function prevents an output from changing from ON to OFF for a specified time. The block contains two separate minimum ON delay functions sharing a common minimum ON time. DI1 is the digital input value and the MNON input is the minimum ON time in minutes. OUT1 follows the state of DI1 with the ON transition but, OUT1 does not allow a change to the OFF condition until the assigned time at input 3 (MNON) has elapsed. DI2 is the digital input of a separate delay timer. OUT2 follows the state of DI2 with the ON transition but, OUT2 does not allow a change to the OFF condition until the assigned time at input 3 (MNON) has elapsed.


UTIL Timer function Min OFF delay

UTIL - Timer function, Min OFF

This timer function prevents an output from changing from OFF to ON for a specified time.Each block contains two separate MIN OFF delay timer functions. Each function shares a common DELAY time.

Input 1 is the digital input and the third input is the minimum OFF time in minutes. Output 1 follows the state of input 1 with the OFF transition but, output 1 does not allow a change to the ON condition until the assigned time at input 3 has elapsed.

Input 2 is the digital input of a separate delay timer. Output 2 follows the state of input 2 with the OFF transition but, output 2 is not allowed a change to the ON condition until the assigned time at input 3 has elapsed.


Timer - Min OFF delay configuration




OPER - Operation - MIN OFF

Inputs



MNOFF - INPUT 3 - The minimum OFF time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)


UTIL Timer function Min OFF delay

Outputs



Applying the block Timer - Min OFF delay

Operation The MIN OFF delay function prevents an output from changing from OFF to ON for a specified time. The block contains two separate MIN OFF delay functions sharing a common minimum OFF time. DI1 is the digital input value and the MNOFF input is the minimum OFF time in minutes. OUT1 follows the state of DI1 with the OFF transition but, OUT1 does not allow a change to the ON condition until the assigned time at input 3 (MNOFF) has elapsed. DI2 is the digital input of a separate delay timer. OUT2 follows the state of DI2 with the OFF transition but, OUT2 does not allow a change to the ON condition until the assigned time at input 3 (MNOFF) has elapsed.

ON

OFF

Min OFF Time

OFF

INPUT 1

OUTPUT 1

OFF

TIME

OFF

INPUT 2

OUTPUT 2

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

Min OFF Time


UTIL Timer function Dual min delay

UTIL - Timer function, Dual min

The minimum ON/OFF function is typically used with a digital output for short cycle protection of connected equipment. The main purpose of this feature is to guarantee that a change in a digital state does not reoccur for a known period of time. Input 1 is the digital input. The second input is the minimum ON time in minutes (0 to 255 minutes) and is the amount of time that the output 1's current value must be ON before being allowed to turn OFF. Input 3 is the minimum OFF time in minutes (0 to 255 minutes) and is the amount of time that the output 1's current value must be OFF before being allowed to turn ON. When the controller is first powered or reset, the minimum OFF timer is in effect. Output 2 is the inverseof output 1.


Timer - Dual min delay configuration




OPER - Operation - DUAL MIN

Inputs

DI1 - INPUT 1 - The input for the delay function. (Default = OFF)

MNON - INPUT 2 - The minimum ON time in minutes. The range of acceptable values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)

MNOFF - INPUT 3 - The minimum OFF time in minutes. The acceptable range of values is from 0.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0 MIN)

Outputs


UTIL Timer function Dual min delay


OUT2 - Output 2- The inverse of output 1.

Applying the block Timer - Dual min delay

Operation The DUAL MIN timer function provides both the minimum ON and minimum OFF functions. This block is typically used with a digital output for short cycle protection of connected equipment. The main purpose of this feature is to guarantee that a change in a digital state does not reoccur for a known period of time. DI1 is the digital input. The second input (MNON) is the minimum ON time in minutes (0 to 255 minutes) and is the amount of time that the OUT1's current value must be ON before being allowed to turn OFF. Input 3 (MNOFF) is the minimum OFF time in minutes (0 to 255 minutes) and is the amount of time that the OUT1's current value must be OFF before being allowed to turn ON. When the controller is first powered or reset, the minimum OFF timer is in effect. OUT2 is the inverseof OUT1.

INPUT 1

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OFF

ONON

TIME

Min ON Time

Min OFF Time

OFF

OFF OFF

ONON

ONON

OFF OFF


WINDO

WINDO - Window block

The WINDO (window) block provides a "window view" of analog and digital values within the TAC MICROZONE II controller to the parent controller. The WINDO block provides data transfer to the "ZONE2" block in the GCM. All of the attributes assigned to the WINDO block can be viewed or pointed to at the ZONE2 block in the GCM. Note: All the physical point values, UI:1 thru UI:8, AO:1 thru AO:4, and DO:1 through DO:8 are automatically sent to the ZONE2 block and therefore their is no need to assign I/O block outouts to the window block.

The TAC MICROZONE II controller contains one WINDO block.

WINDO- window block configuration

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

ACTON NAME

PARAMETERS

INPUTS OUTPUTSWINDOW BLOCK

WINDO:1

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

VALUE

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 AI7 AI8

DV1 DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 AV1 AV2 AV3 AV4 AV5 AV6 AV7 AV8


ACTON - Action - Enables or disables the block function.

Selections include:

NOT USED (Default)

BLOCK USED


WINDO

NAME - Block name - This parameter allows the user to assign a name descriptor to the WINDO block. This name can contain up to 8 alpha-numeric characters. The alpha characters can be either upper or lower case. (Default = blank)

Inputs

DI1 - Digital input 1 - The fixed value or pointer value assigned to this input is made available at the DV 1 output of the WINDO block and at the WINDOW DV1 (DV1) output of the ZONE2 block in the parent controller. (Default = OFF).


:

:


AI1 - Analog input 1 - The fixed value or pointer value assigned to this input is made available at the AV 1 output of the WINDO block and at the WINDOW AV1 (AV1) output of the ZONE2 block in the parent controller. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

AI2 - Analog input 2 - The fixed value or pointer value assigned to this input is made available at the AV 2 output of the WINDO block and at the WINDOW AV2 (AV2) output of the ZONE2 block in the parent controller. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

:

:

AI8- Analog input 8 - The fixed value or pointer value assigned to this input is made available at the AV 8 output of the WINDO block and at the WINDOW AV8 (AV8) output of the ZONE2 block in the parent controller. The range of acceptable values is from -255.0 to 255.0. (Default = 0.0).

Outputs

DV1 - Digital value of the output 1 - This is the value at the input DI1.


:

:



WINDO

AV1 - Analog value of the output 1 - This is the value at the input AI1.


:

:


Applying the block The WINDO block works in conjunction with a ZONE2 block in a parent controller. See the description of the ZONE2 block in the TAC NETWORK 8000 GCM/LCM PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL F-23120. Values other than the input and output values that need to be communicated to a parent controller need to be assigned to a WINDOW block. The ZONE2 block must be configured to the same address as set on the DIP switches on the TAC MICROZONE II controller. Once communications is established between the two controllers, the values assigned at the inputs of the WINDO block are communicated to the ZONE2 block in the parent controller. These values are updated at the frequency of the UPDATE TIME assigned at the ZONE2 block plus some communications time. If communication is interrupted, the ZONE2 block outputs ABNORMAL LOST COMM until communication is restored.

This following figure illustrates a ZONE2 block which has been set up within a parent controller and named AHU 3. This block has been assigned an address which is the same as the DIP switch setting on an TAC MICROZONE II controller which is controlling the air handler defined as AHU 3.

The WINDO block in the TAC MICROZONE II controller is set up to interface both digital and analog values with the ZONE2 block. Here for example, DI1 (Digital input 1) has been assigned a pointer (OSS:1:DAMPR). The value at the output of the OSS block attribute is ON. This value also appears at the WINDO block's output (DV1) and is sent to the ZONE2 block. Analog values sent to the ZONE2 block do not retain their assigned engineering units. The proper engineering units must be reassigned at the ZONE2 block. At the ZONE2 block it is also necessary to set up the number of window digital and analog values which are to be active for the WINDO block.


WINDO


Copyright 2008, TACAll brand names, trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Information contained within this document is subject to change without notice.

F-23118-2

TAC1354 Clifford AvenueP.O. Box 2940Loves Park, IL 61132-2940www.tac.com

tac microzone ii programmer's manual - hvac-talk

Documents